gt3 Series

GT-3 Series Service Manual
Please read this manual before making any adjustments.
GARMENT PRINTER
GT-3 Series US support homepage http://www.brother-usa.com/Garmentprinters/

This service manual is intended for GT-3 series; be sure to read the GT-3 Series instruction manual before this manual.
Carefully read the “SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” below and the whole of this manual to understand this product before you start
maintenance.
As a result of research and improvements regarding this product, some details of this manual may not be the same as those
for the product you purchased.
If you have any questions regarding this product, please contact a Brother dealer.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
[1] Safety indications and their meanings
This instruction manual and the indications and symbols that are used on the printer itself are provided in order to ensure safe
operation of this printer and to prevent accidents and injury to yourself or other people. The meanings of these indications and
symbols are given below.
Indications
The instructions which follow this term indicate situations where failure to follow the
DANGER instructions will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING instructions could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION instructions may result in minor or moderate injury.
Symbols
· · · · · This symbol ( ) indicates something that you should be careful of. The picture inside the triangle
indicates the nature of the caution that must be taken.
(For example, the symbol at left means “beware of injury”.)
· · · · · This symbol ( ) indicates something that you must not do.
· · · · · This symbol ( ) indicates something that you must do. The picture inside the circle indicates the
nature of the thing that must be done.
(For example, the symbol at left means “you must make the ground connection”.)
[2] Notes on safety
DANGER
Wait at least 5 minutes after turning off the power switch and disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet
before opening the right side cover. Do not touch the high-voltage area in the control box as high voltage can result
in severe injury.
WARNING
Basic precautions
To prevent accidents and problems, do not modify Do not handle the power cord with wet hands,
the machine yourself. otherwise it may cause electric shocks.
Brother will not be held responsible for any accidents
or problems resulting from modifications made to the
machine.
GT-3 Series i
WARNING
Installation
Do not set up the printer in a dusty environment. If Do not bend the cords excessively or fasten them
dust collects inside the printer, it may cause fire or too hard with staples or anything similar to secure
electric shocks or problems with correct operation. cords, otherwise there is the danger that fire or
electric shocks could occur.
Be sure to connect the ground. If the ground

connection is not secure, you run a high risk of
receiving a serious electric shock, and problems with
correct operation may also occur.
Printing
If a foreign object gets inside the printer, immediately Do not use the printer when smoke or a bad odor
turn off the power switch and disconnect the power coming from the printer, otherwise it may cause fire
cord, and arrange for a service call to resolve. or electric shocks or problems with correct
If you continue to use the printer while there is a operation.
foreign object inside, it may result in fire or electric Immediately turn off the power switch and
shocks or problems with correct operation. disconnect the power cord, and arrange for a
service call to resolve.
Do not allow the printer to come into contact with
liquids, otherwise it may cause fire or electric shocks
or problems with correct operation.
If any liquid gets inside the printer, immediately turn
off the power switch and disconnect the power cord.
Contact Brother to arrange a service call to resolve.
CAUTION
Environmental requirements
Use the printer in an area which is free from The ambient temperature should be within the
sources of strong electrical noise such as electrical range of 18C to 30C during use.
line noise or static electric noise. Temperatures which are lower or higher than this
Sources of strong electrical noise may cause may cause problems with correct operation.
problems with correct operation.
The relative humidity should be within the range of
Any fluctuations in the power supply voltage should 45% to 85% during use, and no dew formation
be within ±10% of the rated voltage for the printer. should occur in any devices.
Voltage fluctuations which are greater than this Excessively dry or humid environments and dew
may cause problems with correct operation. formation may cause problems with correct
operation.
The power supply capacity should be greater than
the requirements for the printer’s power Use the printer in a place which is adequately
consumption. ventilated.
Insufficient power supply capacity may cause A slight odor is generated when the printed articles
problems with correct operation. are being fixed by heat.
In the event of an electrical storm, turn off the
power and disconnect the power cord from the wall
outlet.
Lightning may cause problems with correct
operation.
ii GT-3 Series
CAUTION
Installation
Setting up and moving of the printer should only be Do not set up the printer in a place where it will be
carried out by a qualified technician. affected by vibration. It may become unbalanced
and fall down, which cause injury or damage to the
The printer machine weighs approximately 111 kg printer.
(245 lb). Transporting and setting up of the printer
should be held in proper way. Do not connect the power cord until setup is
The machine may fall down and cause injury. complete, otherwise the printer may operate if the
power switch is turned on by mistake, which could
The printer must be used on a suitable stable result in injury.
surface, otherwise it may tip over or fall down and
cause injury. Do not climb onto the printer or place heavy objects
Furthermore, the table that supports the printer on top of it, otherwise it may become unbalanced
should be at least 137 cm (53.9 inch) in width and and tip over or fall down and cause injury.
104.5 cm (41.1 inch) in depth, and should be able to
bear a weight of 150 kg (330 lb) or more.
Printing
This printer should only be used by operators who Do not move the Platen by hand.
are appropriately trained in its operation. The Printer may be mechanically and electrically
damaged.
Ensure there is adequate space left for safe working.
The Platen moves forward while operating and it Do not put your hands inside the covers while the
may be injured. printer’s power is turned on, otherwise your hands
may touch against moving parts and this may result
Do not handle the platen while printing. If your hand in injury.
gets caught between the platen or the T-shirt tray
and the covers, it may be injured. When a problem occurs with the operation of the
printer, contact the place of purchase or a qualified
technician.
Maintenance
Wait at least 1 minute after turning off the power Take care not to let the liquids: Ink, Wash Liquid,
switch before opening the front cover. Maintenance Solution, Pretreatment or waste liquid
Do not touch the head heat sink as it may be HOT come into contact with your eyes or onto your skin,
and may cause a burn. otherwise inflammation can result. In case of contact
Be careful not to get your fingers caught when with eyes, do not rub but immediately rinse the eyes
closing the front cover, otherwise it may result in with water.
injury to your fingers. Furthermore, do not drink the liquids: Ink, Wash
Do not move the Platen by hand. Liquid, Maintenance Solution, Pretreatment or waste
The Printer may be mechanically and electrically liquid under any circumstances, as they can cause
damaged. vomiting and diarrhea.
Keep the liquids out of the reach of children.
Do not disassemble the ink cartridge.
Disassembly, assembly, maintenance and inspection Be sure to wear protective goggles and gloves when
of this printer should only be carried out by qualified handling the grease, so that they do not get into
technicians. your eyes or onto your skin. If the grease gets into
Ask your Brother dealer or a qualified electrician to your eyes or onto your skin, inflammation can result.
carry out any maintenance and inspection of the Furthermore, do not drink or eat the grease. They
electrical system. may cause diarrhea or vomiting.
Turn OFF the power switch and disconnect the Keep the grease out of the reach of children.
power cable before carrying out the following When replacing parts and installing optional
operations. The printer may start operating if accessories, be sure to use only genuine Brother
incorrectly operated, resulting in possible injury. parts.
- Inspection, adjustment or repair Brother will not be held responsible for any
accidents or problems resulting from the use of
Turn OFF the power switch before plugging in or
non-genuine parts.
removing the power cord.
Failure to observe this may result in Control Box
malfunction.
Always return any removed safety protection devices

to their original location, and ensure that they are
functioning normally.
GT-3 Series iii

[3] Warning labels
The following warning labels appear on the printer.

Please follow the instructions on the labels at all times when using the printer. If the labels have been removed or are
difficult to read, please contact your nearest Brother dealer.
1 2
3 4
5 6
Watch your fingers, or you may be

10 injured.
11 High temperature warning display
Be sure to connect the ground. If

12 the ground connection is not
secure, you run a high risk of
receiving a serious electric shock,
and problems with correct
operation may also occur.
iv GT-3 Series
Grease
Wash Liquid
Waste Ink Tank
Pretreatment (20kg) Maintenance Solution (5kg)

Ink Cartridge
Pretreatment (5kg)
0085Y
GT-3 Series v
Table of Contents
1. About GT-3 Series ··································1
2-5-7-1. Assignment of your computer’s
1-1. Specifications..................................................... 1
Address .......................................................... 42
1-2. Software Specifications ..................................... 1
2-5-7-2. Assignment of GT-3’s IP Address ............. 45
1-3. Identifying Your Printer’s Parts.......................... 2
2-5-7-3. GT-3 Setting on the LAN............................ 47
1-3-1. Front ................................................................ 2
2-5-8. Troubleshooting ............................................ 54
1-3-2. Right ................................................................ 3
2-5-8.1 Windows 7 / Windows 8 will not recognize the
1-3-3. Rear................................................................. 3
GT-3 Printer Driver after you connect to your PC
1-3-4. Inside of the Front Cover .............................. 4
with USB cable.................................................. 54
1-3-5. Upper part of the Maintenance Unit ............ 5
2-6. Preparation and Check before Use.................. 60
1-3-6. Under the Platen............................................. 6
2-6-1. Installing Ink Cartridge.................................... 60
1-3-7. Control Panel ................................................ 7
2-6-2. Installing Ink .................................................... 62
1-3-7-1. Display ....................................................... 8
2-6-3. Test Print ......................................................... 65
1-3-7-2. Menu list....................................................... 9
2-6-4. Head Cleaning................................................ 67
2. Setting up GT-3 Series························11 2-6-5. Firing Adjustment of the Print Heads ............ 68
2-1. Setup Requirements.......................................... 11 2-6-6. Aligning the Print Position of White / Color Print
2-1-1. Environment.................................................... 11 Heads................................................................. 72
2-1-2. Required Tools ............................................... 12
2-1-3. Other Requirements....................................... 12
3. Operation ························································75
3-1. Menu................................................................... 75
2-1-4. Consumable Requirements and Options ..... 13
3-1-1. User Menu / Advanced Menu........................ 75
2-2. Unpacking .......................................................... 14
3-1-2. Supplementary description of the User
2-2-1. Unpacking Procedure .................................... 14
Menu .......................................................................... 75
2-2-2. Transportation of GT-3................................... 15
3-1-2-1. Test Print.................................................... 76
2-2-3. Installing Waste Ink Tank............................... 16
3-1-2-2. Maintenance Parts Exchange.................. 76
2-2-4. Removing protection materials...................... 16
3-1-2-3. Tube Cleaning........................................... 77
2-3. Levelling GT-3.................................................... 18
3-1-3. How to go to Advanced Menu ....................... 77
2-4. Setting up GT-3 Series...................................... 19
3-1-4. List of Advanced Menu .................................. 77
2-4-1. Installing the Print Heads ............................... 19
3-1-5. Description of the Advanced Menu ............... 78
2-5. Preparing your PC ............................................. 25
3-1-5-1. CR Origin Sensor Adjustment.................. 78
2-5-1. When you have GT-541 / GT-782 ................ 25
3-1-5-2. Firmware Update ...................................... 78
2-5-2. PC preparation: For Windows XP (32 bit) .... 25
3-1-5-3. Output Check ............................................ 78
2-5-3. Connection with USB 2.0 Cable:
3-1-5-4. Input Check ............................................... 78
For Windows XP ....................................................... 26
3-1-5-5. Temperature Adjustment.......................... 79
2-5-4. Network Settings: For Windows XP.............. 28
3-1-5-6. Solid Print................................................... 79
2-5-4-1. Assignment of your computer’s
3-1-5-7. Log Level ................................................... 79
Address …………………………………… 28
3-1-5-8. Pump Pressure ......................................... 80
2-5-4-2. Assignment of GT-3’s IP Address ............. 31
3-2. Firmware Update ............................................... 82
2-5-4-3. GT-3 Setting on the LAN............................ 33
3-2-1. The difference between GT-3 Firmware
2-5-5. PC Preparation: For Windows Vista / Windows 7
Update (PC) and USB Flash Drive .................. 82
/ Windows 8 (32 bit / 64 bit) .............................. 40
3-2-2. How to Update from USB Flash Drive.......... 82
2-5-6. Connection with USB 2.0 Cable: Windows Vista
3-2-3. Countermeasure for Cancelled Update........ 83
/ Windows 7 / Windows 8 ................................. 41
3-2-3-1 Confirmation of Cancelled conditions. ...... 83
2-5-7. Network Settings: For Windows Vista / Windows
3-2-3-2. Restart the updates except Main
7 / Windows 8 .................................................. 42
GT-3 Series
program.............................................................. 83 6-1-15. Sensor Flap .................................................. 162
3-2-3-3. Update with Boot System program.......... 83 6-1-16. Assembling / Disassembling of the
3-2-3-4 Upgrade in Flash ROM writing error......... 84 Maintenance Unit ............................................ 165
3-3. GT-3 Service Tool.............................................. 85 6-1-17. Wiper Cleaner............................................... 171
3-3-1. Precautions of using GT-3 Service Tool....... 85 6-1-18. Checking and Adjusting the Wiper
3-3-2. Resetting "Clean Tube W" Warning.............. 85 Blade Assy ......................................................... 173
3-3-3. Demonstration Mode...................................... 86 6-1-19. Pump Tube ................................................... 178
3-4. Getting Log File and Analysis ........................... 86 6-1-20. Suction Pump Assy...................................... 183
3-4-1. Precautions of getting Log File...................... 86 6-1-21. Replace the Pump Sensor .......................... 188
3-4-2. Getting Log File .............................................. 87 6-1-22. Cap Rubber .................................................. 190
3-4-3. View Log File with GT-3 Service Tool........... 87 6-1-23. Cassette SW Harness Assy........................ 192
6-1-24. Sensor for the CL Drive Cam ...................... 194
4. Solving Print Quality Problems ··89
6-1-25. Motor of the CL Drive Cam.......................... 196
4-1. Checking the Cause of Misfiring....................... 90
6-1-26. Wiper Sensor................................................ 198
4-1-1. Detailed Check Flow ...................................... 91
6-1-27. Adjusting the Height of Wiper Blade ........... 200
4-1-2. Heavy misfiring in printing (Checking Cracks
6-1-28. Adjusting the position of Wiper Blades ....... 203
inside the Tube) ............................................... 98
6-1-29. Wiper Motor .................................................. 205
4-1-3. Faded Print by Dryness (Changing the
6-1-30. Waste Ink Tubes .......................................... 206
Wipe Frequency) ............................................... 100
6-1-31. Solenoid for Head Cleaning ........................ 211
4-1-4. Cleaning the Tubes and Print Heads
6-1-32. Ink Supply Mechanism ................................ 213
(White/Color Tube Cleaning) ............................ 101
6-1-33. Replacing the Filter on the Print Head........ 220
5. Regular Maintenance ···························106 6-1-33-1. Replacing the Filter for CMYK.............. 220
5-1. Cleaning ............................................................. 108 6-1-33-2. Replacing the Filter for White ............... 223
5-1-1. Cleaning the Print Head Caps and Wiper 6-1-34. Ink Switch Dog ............................................. 226
Blades................................................................. 108 6-1-35. Tubes ............................................................ 232
5-1-2. Cleaning the Print Head Nozzles .................. 110 6-1-36. Needles......................................................... 267
5-1-3. White Ink Maintenance .................................. 112 6-1-37. Ink Retrieval Unit (GT-381/
5-1-4. Cleaning the inside of the printer................... 113 GT-361 only) ........................................................ 273
5-1-5. Cleaning the Encoder Strip............................ 113 6-1-38. Print Heads................................................... 279
6. Replacing Parts ·········································116 6-1-39. Print Head FFC ............................................ 288
6-1. Replacing the Printer Parts ............................... 117 6-1-40. Waste Ink Units ............................................ 292
6-1-1. Required Tools ............................................... 117 6-1-41. Exhaust Fan ................................................. 299
6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling the Covers ........ 118 6-1-42. Removing the Needle Felt........................... 301
6-1-3. Assembling/Disassembling of the Platen ..... 123 6-1-43. Felts on Cartridge Base............................... 307
6-1-4. Platen Belt and Reduction Belt...................... 128 6-2. Replacing the Electrical Parts........................... 309
6-1-5. Adjusting the tension of Platen Belt and 6-2-1. Precautions in Adjustment............................. 309
Reduction Belt ................................................... 133 6-2-2. Control Box, Operation Panel, PCBs............ 310
6-1-6. Platen Motor ................................................... 135 6-2-3. Motors, Solenoids, Sensors and Switches... 311
6-1-7. Platen Pulley Ball Bearing.............................. 139 6-2-4. Control Box Assy............................................ 313
6-1-8. Platen Origin Sensor...................................... 142 6-2-5. Connectors ..................................................... 314
6-1-9. Adjustment of the Platen Sensor Dog........... 144 6-2-6. Connector Locations ...................................... 314
6-1-10. Platen Top Plate and Shoulder Bar ............ 147 6-2-7. Main PCB Assy .............................................. 318
6-1-11. Leveling of the Platen Top Plate.................. 150 6-2-8. EMC Filter....................................................... 322
6-1-12. Carriage Motor.............................................. 153 6-2-9. Speaker........................................................... 322
6-1-13. Carriage Driving Parts.................................. 155 6-2-10. Power Unit .................................................... 323
6-1-14. Encoder Strip................................................ 158 6-2-11. Surge Absorber PCB Assy .......................... 324
6-2-12. Control Box Assy.......................................... 325
GT-3 Series
6-2-13. Panel Body Assy.......................................... 330
6-2-14. Panel PCB Assy........................................... 332
6-2-15. USB Host PCB Assy.................................... 334
6-2-16. Encoder PCB Assy ...................................... 335
6-2-17. Maintenance PCB Assy............................... 336
6-2-18. Carriage PCB Assy...................................... 337
6-2-19. Ink Sensor PCB Assy .................................. 339
6-2-20. Ink Switch PCB Assy ................................... 340
6-2-21. Lithium Battery.............................................. 342
6-2-22. FFC ............................................................... 343
7. Transporting the GT-3 Series /

Required Maintenance for Long-term
Storage····································································346
7-1. Transporting the GT-3 Series ........................... 346
7-2. Required Maintenance for Long-term
Storage ..................................................................... 350
8. Error Code List ··········································354

8-1. Interpreting the Display...................................... 354
8-2. Warnings ............................................................ 354
8-3. Error Messages ................................................. 356
9. Block Diagram of the Control

Circuit·······························································365
GT-3 Series
1. About GT-3 Series

1-1. Specifications
仕様
Printing method Direct-to-Garment Color Inkjet Printer
Dimensions 1370 (W) ×1045 (D) × 660 (H) mm (53.9” × 41.1” × 26.0”)
Machine weight Approx. 111 Kg (245 lb)
Maximum print area 355.6 mm × 406.4 mm (14”x16”)
Ink type Water-based pigment ink
Ink color Up to 5 colors CMYKＷ
(GT-341: 4 colors CMYK, GT-361/GT-381 5 colors CMYKW)
Print head type On demand piezo print head
Number of print heads 4 (GT-341), 6(GT-361), 8(GT-381)
Resolution 600 dpi × 600 dpi, 1200 dpi × 1200 dpi
Print direction Bi-directional, Uni-directional
Output Printer driver (USB cable, File output)
Environment Temperature: 32 °F to 104°F (0 °C to 40 °C)
For storage: Humidity: 20 % to 85 % (no condensation)
Operating your printer: Temperature: 50 °F to 95 °F (10 °C to 35 °C)
Humidity: 45 % to 85 % (no condensation)
For the best print Temperature: 64 °F to 86 °F (18 °C to 30 °C)
result: Humidity: 45 % to 85 % (no condensation)
Power supply Single-phase100V, 50/60 Hz (JP)
120 V, 50/60 Hz (US)
230 V, 50/60 Hz (EU, Oceania)
Power consumption 0.4 A (average)
Ink cure Conveyor oven (recommended) : 3.5 minutes at 160°C (320°F
Head press: 35 seconds at 180°C (356°F)
Time and temperature may vary depending on which manufacturer’s dryer is
used.
Pretreatment Pretreatment is necessary to print with White ink. Apply either with a roller or a
(GT-361/GT-381) spray, or applying devices in a certain amount of Pretreatment and be sure to
cure with the Heat Press with higher pressure. (35 seconds at 180°C (356°F))
1-2. Software Specifications

Latest Windows XP 32bit,
Supported OS
Windows Vista, Wndows 7, Windows 8 (32 bit / 64 bit)
Supported interface USB 2.0, USB flash drive
256 MB RAM (512 MB or more is recommended)
Minimum system
128 MB free disk space (256 MB or more is recommended)
requirements
1 GHz CPU
Recommended Applications Adobe Photoshop, Adobe Photoshop Elements,
for precise output Adobe Illustrator, CorelDRAW, Paint Shop Photo Pro
GT-3 Series 1
1-3. Identifying Your Printer’s Parts

1-3-1. Front
0043Y
No. Name Description
1 Platen Holds the T-shirt to be printed.
2 Platen Sheet Prevents a T-shirt from slipping so that an image is printed on your desired
position.
3 T-shirt Tray Keeps the T-shirt parts hanging from the Platen (e.g. sleeves) on this
T-shirt Tray.
4 Front Cover Open this to work on the inside of your printer, after you turn OFF the
printer. (If you open the Front Cover while operating, the power
automatically turns off.)
5 Stop Lever Unlocks the lock of the Front Cover. Keep pushing it to release the lock
when you close the Front Cover.
6 Control Panel Indicates the status of the printer. Use this to operate your printer.
See “1-3-7. Control Panel” for the details.
7 Power Switch Turns on/off your printer.
8 Shoulder Bar Adjusts the T-shirt position.
9 USB flash drive Slot Inserts USB flash drive.
10 Ink Cartridge Slots Load the Ink Cartridges of the appropriate color: from the left side W1, W2,
W3, W4, Black (K), Magenta (M), Cyan (C), Yellow (Y).
11 Ink Cartridge Storage Stores the new Ink Cartridges.
12 Guard Bar Keeps the loading space of the Platens.
13 Clearance Sensor Cancels an operation for safety, if it detects obstructions on the Platen.
(Obstruction Sensor) When you lower the platen for printing thicker materials, use Platen Button
on the Control Panel and check the movement if the material does not hit
the flap of the Clearance Sensor. The sensor will not work when the
clearance between the print head and the material is too wide (the platen is
too low). Confirm the platen height by referring "4-5. Placing the T-shirt on
the Platen" in the Instruction Manual.
14 Model Plate Indicates the serial number of the product.
2 GT-3 Series
1-3-2. Right
0044Y
1 Exhaust slot The outlet of the Exhaust Fan. Do not cover; Leave the space of 20
cm or more to release the exhaust air.
1-3-3. Rear
0045Y
1 AC cord socket Inserts AC cord.
2 USB port Inserts USB cable to PC.
3 LAN port Inserts LAN cable to PC.
4 Rear Cover Covers the Platen moving area.
5 Waste Ink Tube Drains the waste ink. Adjust the Tube length so that the Tube should go
straight down into the tank, without hitting the edge at the bottom.
6 Waste Ink Tank Holds the waste ink. Be aware of the room.
GT-3 Series 3
1-3-4. Inside of the Front Cover

Cancel any operation, restore the Platens and turn off your printer before opening the Front Cover.
Lift the Front Cover with both hands until the lock is set when opening. Keep pushing the Stop Lever to
release the lock and close the Front Cover with both hands.
<Note>If you open the Front Cover while operating, the power automatically turns off.
0046Y
0047Y

1 Print Heads (Front) Jets the Color Ink to the platen.
From the left black, magenta, cyan, and yellow.
2 Print Heads (Back) Jets the White Ink to the platen.
From the left W1, W2, W3 and W4.
3 Filter Cover, Fan Filter, Absorbs ink mist inside the printer. Exchange the Fan Filter inside the
Exhaust Fan Filter Cover at the timing when you exchange Wiper Cleaner. See
"6-1-4. Replacing the Fan Filter" in the Instruction Manual.
4 Roller Felts Protects the roller by wiping off the surface. Exchange the Fan Filter
inside the Filter Cover at the timing when you exchange Wiper
Cleaner. See "6-1-5. Replacing the Roller Felts" in the Instruction
Manual.
5 Carriage Guide Shaft This may be covered with ink mist and dust. Keep Clean to move the
Carriage smoothly. See "5-1-4. Cleaning the inside of the printer".
4 GT-3 Series
1-3-5. Upper part of the Maintenance Unit
0048Y
1 Caps (Front: Color side) Cover the surface of the Print Heads and absorb ink in head cleaning.
From the left black, magenta, cyan, and yellow.
2 Caps (Back: White side) Cover the surface of the Print Heads and absorb ink in head cleaning.
From the left W1, W2, W3, and W4.
3 Wipers (Color / White) Wipe off the waste ink on the surface of Print Heads. Keep them clean
for print quality at the timing when you exchange Wiper Cleaner. See
"6-1-2. Replacing the Wiper Cleaner and Cleaning the Caps / Wipers”
in the Instruction Manual.
4 Wiper Cleaner Removes the waste ink on the Wiper. Exchange regularly and keep
(Front: Color side) them clean for print quality, at the timing when you open the new ink
5 Wiper Cleaner cartridge or when you see the warning on the display of Control Panel.
(Back: White side) Remove the projections of both sides and lift it up. See "6-1-2.
Replacing the Wiper Cleaner and Cleaning the Caps / Wipers" in the
Instruction Manual.
6 Flushing Plate Sponge Hold the flushed ink for keeping print quality. Exchange them at the
Flushing Plate Felt timing when you exchange Wiper Cleaner. See "6-1-3. Replacing the
Flushing Plate Sponge and Flushing Plate Felt" in the Instruction
Manual.
GT-3 Series 5
1-3-6. Under the Platen
0049Y

1 Platen Fixing Lever Fixes the Platen.
Tighten/Loosen this lever to install/uninstall the Platen and to adjust the
Platen height.
<In case [B] that you cannot rotate Platen Fix Lever (1) by hitting the
Platen (3)>
Move the Platen Height Adjustment Lever (2) to the A position in the right
image and loose the Platen Fixing Lever (1). When you pull out the Lever
(1), you can turn it with no load so that move the Lever (1) to
easy-to-operate position. Then tighten the Lever (1) to fix the Platen.
2 Platen Height Adjusts the Platen height.
Adjustment Lever Left most position "A" is the normal T-shirt position.
Check the exact height with Platen Button on Control Panel when you print
on thicker material. The adequate clearance between the Flap Sensor and
the printed material is app. 2 mm. See "4-5. Placing the T-shirt on the Platen”
in the Instruction Manual.
Ink mist may spreads inside the printer If you print with wider clearance, the
ink mist will spread inside the printer and the printing material, and may
damage the sensors.
3 Bush Platen Shaft
Fixes and holds the Platen.
4 Platen Positioning Plate
<Note>
You can use Lower-the-Platen Assy (option) when you regularly print thicker material, which can lower the
platen by 13 mm than the standard height. See "4-4-3. Lowering the Platen height" in the Instruction Manual.
6 GT-3 Series
1-3-7. Control Panel
0050Y
1 Error Lamp OFF: no errors
ON: one or more errors have been detected. See "8. Error Code List".
2 Power Lamp ON: shows the power is ON.
3 Head Cleaning Cleans all the Print Heads with normal cleaning. (The number of cleaning
Button depends on the model).
4 Platen Button Loads / Ejects the Platen. Press this button when you check the adequate height
of the Platen after you change the height. See "4-5. Placing the T-shirt on the
Platen" in the Instruction Manual.
5 Stop Button Cancels printing or Print Head cleaning.
Returns to Standby mode.
6 Up Button Selects the previous (upper) item. Increases a numeric value. Opens the Menu
display.
7 Down Button Selects the next (lower) item. Decreases a numeric value. Opens the Menu
display.
8 OK Button Executes the selected command. Opens the Menu display. Clears the error
status.
9 Back Button Returns to the previous display. Opens the Menu display.
10 Display Displays the Job Comment of the print data received, the status of the printer, and
the menu items for various settings.
11 Print Button Indicates the print data status and starts the print.
OFF: No print data has been received
Flashing: Receiving a print data
ON: Print data is ready to print.
<Note>
On machine initialization these lamps have a 30-second self check time.
GT-3 Series 7
1-3-7-1. Display
The following image indicates that GT-3 has received a print data and ready to print. The Display indicates
Job, printer status and the information needed for printing operations.
01e0026Y
No. Item Shown Description
1 Job Name Shows the indentified name of the print data, which is automatically set by
Printer Driver.
2 Job Comment Shows the 30 characters of the Job Comment set by the operator with
Printer Driver.
3 Amount of Ink Shows how much ink (cc) is required for making one print of the received
Required data.
Shows warning message(s) if necessary.
4 Platen Size Shows Platen Size set by Printer Driver.
5 Number of Platen Shows the number of the Platen Move (loading/unloading) in printing one
Move print data.
6 Number of Print Shows the number of prints completed of the print data.
7 Printer Status Shows the printer status.
8 Amount of Ink Shows amount of ink remained in each cartridge, from the left, W1, W2, W3,
Remained W4 , Black (K), Magenta (M), Cyan (C) and Yellow (Y).
It flashes when ink is low. Prepare the new cartridge(s).
9 Uni-Directional Print
Shows when the printer or the print data is set to Uni-directional printing.
Icon
10 Number of White
Shows how many White Print Heads are used in printing one print data.
Print Head Icon
11 Resolution Icon Shows the resolution of the print data.
<Note> When one or more errors are detected, error message(s) will be displayed instead.
8 GT-3 Series
1-3-7-2. Menu List

Push either one of the OK Button, Up Button, Down Button and Back Button to go into the Menu.
Menu Content
Executes Head Cleaning of either one by one or of all four Print Heads.
See "7-2-2. Cleaning the Print Heads" in the Instruction Manual.
Head Cleaning Normal: normal mis-firing
Powerful: After cleaning the Print Head nozzles, when normal head cleaning
does not work.
Prints to check mis-firing and print quality.
Nozzle Check CMYK / W: shows mis-firing
Test Print Standard Check CMYK / W: shows general print quality
Whiteness: confirms the white quality
Head Test CMYK / W: confirms which print head is broken
Flushes the " thinner and white-less" dull White Ink caused by sinking white
Daily Cleaning White pigment. See "6-2-1. Daily Cleaning White for replacing dull White Ink" in the
Instruction Manual.
Print Data Load Reads a print data (AR3 file) in USB flash drive. The inside folder shows with [...].
Sets the print direction. This setting is prior to Printer Driver setting.
Auto： Default Bi-directional, Printer Driver setting is available.
Print Direction Always Uni-Directional: always prints Uni-directionally.
Always Bi-Directional: always prints bi-directionally. See "7-2-4. Changing the
Print Direction" in the Instruction Manual.
Goes into the Maintenance submenu.
White Tube Cleaning:
Cleans the pigment in White Print Heads and Tubes. See "4-1-4. Cleaning the
Tubes and Print Heads (White/Color Tube Cleaning)".
Load White: Loads White Ink into the Tubes filled with Maintenance Solution
after White Tube Cleaning. See "4-1-4. Cleaning the Tubes and Print
Heads (White/Color Tube Cleaning)".
Initial Cleaning:
Loads ink into the empty new Tubes and Print Heads. CMYK ink is loaded
directly into Tubes. Maintenance Solution is required before White ink.
Maintenance Parts Exchange: See "6-1-2" to "6-1-7" in the Instruction Manual.
Reset CMYK Filter: Resets the warning after you replace K/C or M/Y Filter with
the new.
Maintenance
Nozzle Cleaning: Select this menu when you cannot solve mis-firing. See
"7-2-6. Cleaning the Print Head Nozzles" in the Instruction Manual.
CR Encoder Strip Cleaning:
See “5-1-5. Cleaning the Encoder Strip” or "6-1-7. Cleaning the Encoder
Strip" in the Instruction Manual.
Head Replacement:
See "6-1-38. Print Heads“ or “7-2-7. Replacing the Print Head" in the
Instruction Manual.
Color Tube Cleaning:
See "4-1-4. Cleaning the Tubes and Print Heads (White/Color Tube
Cleaning)"
Log Copy to USB:
See "3-4. Getting Log File and Analysis”.
GT-3 Series 9
Menu Content
Goes into the Printer Setting.
LCD Contrast: Adjusts the Display contrast.
See "3-4-1. Adjusting the Display Contrast" in the Instruction Manual.
Speaker Volume: Adjusts the speaker volume. See "3-4-2. Adjusting the
Speaker Volume" in the Instruction Manual.
Temperature: Sets Fahrenheit / Centigrade. See "3-4-3. Temperature" in the
Instruction Manual.
Auto Cleaning Interval: See "7-2-5. Changing the Auto Cleaning Setting " in the
Instruction Manual.
CR Speed Adjustment: Adjusts the increase/decrease of the Carriage speed.
See "7-2-9. Adjusting the CR Speed" in the Instruction Manual.
Printer Setting
Flushing Interval: Adjusts the number of lines (interval) to flush ink in printing.
See "7-2-10. Adjusting the Flushing Interval" in the Instruction Manual.
Flushing Volume: Adjusts the ink volume in flushing. See "7-2-11. Adjusting the
Flushing Volume" in the Instruction Manual.
Daily Cleaning W Setting: Adjusts the amount of White Ink that is flushed in Daily
Cleaning White. See "7-2-12. Adjusting the amount of White Ink in Daily
Cleaning White" in the Instruction Manual.
Auto Job Delete: Deletes the print data automatically after the print number
which is set with Printer Driver is finished. Default is OFF.
GT-341 mode (No White): Sets the printer to stop all the operation of White
Heads. See "6-2-５. Required Maintenance for the Long Storage" in the
Instruction Manual.
Total Print Shows the number of prints.
Platen Reset Restores the Platen.
Sets the language shown on the display. See "3-4-4. Language" in the Instruction
Language
Manual.
Version Shows versions of the firmware.
10 GT-3 Series
2. Setting up GT-3 Series

2-1. Setup Requirements
2-1-1. Environment
[cm]
0051Y
Locate your printer taking the following into account.

1. The printer in installed in environmentally-acceptable conditions. (Refer to “1. About GT-3 Series”.)
2. Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, dust, extremes of humidity. (Using the humidifier in dry conditions is
strongly recommended for print quality).
3. Never use an extension cable.
4. A working space must be left around the printer.
Minimum space of 100 cm (39.4 inch) on the front and the right. Keep away from the right side of the
Exhaust Fan at least by 20 cm (7.9 inch).
5. The body size is approximately 137 cm × 104.5 cm × 66 cm. (53.9” × 41.1” × 26.0”), and the weight is
approximately 111 kg (245 lb).
6. The table that supports the printer should be at least 137 cm (53.9 inch) in width and 104.5 cm (41.1
inch) in depth, and should be able to bear a weight of 150 kg (330 lb) or more. Its tabletop must be level.
GT-3 Series 11
2-1-2. Required Tools

Prepare the following tools.
 Phillips screwdriver: M3 to M5
 Socket Wrench or Ring spanner: 8 mm
 Wrench: 17 mm
 Spirit Level
 Anti-static Wrist Band
2-1-3. Other Requirements

Prepare the devices and tools that meet the following requirements.
USB cable:
USB 2.0-compliant device cable (A/B)
<Note> Using other types of USB cables may result in improper connection.
USB Flash Drive:

Capacity under 32GB, FAT32 formatted
Heat press:
Must be able to handle the area of Platen 14 x 16 (355.6 mm x 406.4 mm) and maintain heat production of
356 °F (180 °C) for 35 seconds. Pretreatment must be cured with the heat press instead of oven to keep the
surface flat and smooth.
<Note>
When you print with White ink, we recommend using oven instead of heat press. (320°F (160 °C), 3 and half
minutes with the tunnel 2.4 meter long as a rough indication.
Separator sheet (parchment):

Be sure to use this to make the surface smooth and flat in curing the Pretreatment and Ink, especially with
White Ink.
Urethane mat (continuous foam):

Use this to release the hot air quickly in curing Pretreatment.
T-shirt (printed material)

Cotton 100%
Light-colored polyester-mixed cotton (cotton should be 50% or more)
Dark-colored polyester-mixed cotton (cotton should be 70% or more)
<Note>
 Some manufacturing brands may not work as good as 100% cotton garment.
You need to test prior to your production, especially when you print on something new and unknown
materials.
 Pretreatment on some T-shirts may be seen after applied and cured. In that case, wash lightly with water
to remove the mark.
 The following issues may occur with Pretreatment. Test before you print.
* Some of the dyes used for some manufacturing brands or the models, or even the difference of lots,
may be decolorized by Pretreatment; we recommend you test the garment before printing.
* The dye in dark-colored polyester-mixed garment can easily come out, called “dye migration" and may
color the White Ink (especially the garment with 70% or less cotton mixed).
12 GT-3 Series
2-1-4. Consumable Requirements and Options

Make the customers use the following Brother genuine items.
Consumables Parts Code Maintenance/Replacement parts Parts Code

Black Ink Cartridge 180 cc GC-30K18 Print Head SB3184
380 cc GC-30K38
Wiper Cleaner SB3101
Magenta Ink Cartridge 180 cc GC-30M18
380 c GC-30M38 Wiper assembly W/Box SB3635
Cyan Ink Cartridge 180 cc GC-30C18 Grease SB3229
380 cc GC-30C38 K/C Filter (for Black and Cyan) SB3987
Yellow Ink Cartridge 180 cc GC-30Y18 M/Y Filter (for Magenta and Yellow) SB3988
380 cc GC-30Y38
White Ink Cartridge 380 cc x 2 pcs GC-30W38 W1/W3 Filter (for W1 and W3) SB4061
Maintenance Solution（5 kg） GC-50S5K W2/W4 Filter (for W2 and W4) SB4062
Pretreatment 5kg GC-30P5KA
20kg GC-30P20A
Maintenance Cleaning Kit SB3168
Nozzle Cleaning Kit SB3082
Wash Liquid SA6248
Options Parts Code
Middle platen 14x16 SB3105
Platen Sheet SB3035
Youth Platen 10x12 SA6399
Platen Sheet S SA6401
Baby Platen 7x8 SA8213
Platen Sheet SS SA8211
Pretreatment Roller SB1290
Waste Ink Tank SB2582
Maintenance Cartridge W SB3264
Maintenance Cartridge (Color) SB3265
Filter Cartridge W SB2512
Filter Cartridge (Color) SB2508
Capping Cartridge W SB3047
GT-3 Series 13
2-2. Unpacking
2-2-1. Unpacking Procedure
Unpack the printer by following the steps 1 to 8.
<Note>
Do not turn ON the printer until you finish the steps "2-2-4. Removing protection material” or the printer may
be damaged by unexpected motion.
Accessories
0176Y
14 GT-3 Series
2-2-2. Transportation of GT-3
CAUTION
The printer machine weighs approximately 111 kg (245 lb). Transporting and setting up of the
printer should be held in proper way.
The machine may fall down and cause injury.
When transporting and installing the printer, put your hands in the positions as shown in the
illustration.
0019N
Positions where you must not lift.
0020N
GT-3 Series 15
2-2-3. Installing Waste Ink Tank

Before turning ON the printer, be sure to fix the Waste Ink Tank (1) to the table with the two straps, etc.
After fixing it with the straps, insert the Waste Ink Tube (2) into the Waste Ink Tank (1).
<Important!>
・Be sure to insert the tube at a level so that it is not completely submerged in the waste ink.
・Be sure that the tube should not fold or bend.
Failure to follow the precautions above can negatively impact the printing quality by causing an increase in the
internal tube pressure. Sometimes the waste ink may overflow inside of the printer by restricting the waste ink
flow.
0162Y
2-2-4. Removing protection materials

Make sure to remove protection materials before starting your printer.
<Strap Removal>
Remove the strap (1) that fixes the Carriage.
Cut or unite the strap.
0163Y
16 GT-3 Series
< Cushioning Removal >

Remove the Cushioning (2) from the Ink Cartridge Storage Rack.
0164Y
1. Separate the Cushioning in two pieces.
0163Y
2. Flatten and tilt it to pull it out.
0166Y
3. Follow the same steps for the other piece.
0167Y
GT-3 Series 17
2-3. Levelling GT-3

Use a spirit level to level the GT-3.
1. Place the spirit level (1) on the Platen in the lateral direction as shown below.
(1)
2. Loosen the four nuts (3) of the Adjusters (2) at the bottom of the Main Frame.
(3) (3)
(2) (2)
3. Rotate the Adjusters (2) to adjust the levelness in the lateral direction by less than 1 mm/.
・Rotate the Adjuster CLOCKWISE to raise the printer.
・Rotate the Adjuster COUNTERCLOCKWISE to lower the printer.
<Note> Adjust the adjuster (2) within 32 mm. See the image below.
(3)
32 mm or shorter
(2)
0022N
18 GT-3 Series
4. Place the spirit level (1) longitudinally on the Platen as shown below.
(1)
5. Rotate the Adjusters (2) to adjust the levelness in the lateral direction by less than 1 mm/.
6. Place the spirit level on the Platen in the lateral direction again to verify whether the printer is still level in
both directions.
If the levelness is not within 1 mm/m, repeat the steps 3 to 5.
7. When the adjustment is complete, tighten the four Nuts for the Adjusters.
2-4. Setting up GT-3 Series

1. Refer to the Uncrate Manual packed in the crate with the printer when you unpack and setup the
accessories.
2. Confirm the following pints before you connect the AC cord.
・The Wiper Cleaners, Flushing Sponge / Flushing Felts and other Exchange Parts should be mounted
on the printer.
・The Waste Ink Tube should be mounted properly; straight, without touching the bottom of the Waste Ink
Tank*.
（*･･･Parts Code is in “2-1-4. Consumable Requirements and Options”）
・The Rear Cover (Cover PB) should be mounted.
・The space should be at least 30 cm in the front for Platen moving forward, at least 20 cm in the right for
air flow from the Exhaust Fan.
・The strap that fixes the Carriage should be removed.
3. Connect the AC cord and the printer, and plug in. Turn ON the printer.
2-4-1. Installing the Print Heads
0028N
<Note>
・Print Heads are delicate and easy to damage, please handle with care.
・Do not mount/dismount the Print Heads on the Maintenance Unit; the surface of the Print Heads will hit the
edge of Wiper Cleaner and may cause serious damage. Select the menu from the Operation Panel or move
the Carriage over the Flushing Plate by hand.
* Be sure to remove the Wiper Cleaners and lower the Caps beforehand if you have to operate on the
Maintenance Unit.
GT-3 Series 19
1. Move the Carriage to where the Print Heads can be mounted. Go to the Advanced Menu and select
[Output Check].
Select the [Carriage Test] and [To Flushing Position]. The Carriage moves to the Flushing position when
you push the OK Button.
Advanced Menu Output Check Carriage Test

▲ CR Origin Sensor Adjustment ▲ Cap Test
Firmware Update Wiper Test ▲ To Capping Position
Output Check Carriage Test To Flushing Position
▼ Input Check ▼ Solenoid Test ▼ To Center
2. Turn OFF the printer.

3. Open the Front Cover with both hands until it is locked with the stopper.
4. Put on an Anti-static Wrist Band for safety operation. Touch the metal area of the printer (e.g. covers) to
reduce the static electricity.
5. Remove the plastic cover on the Carriage PCB. Disconnect the white cable (left) and remove the four
claws on the both edges (right).
6. Remove the silicone tubes that are attached the screws under the Carriage PCB (left), and remove the
holes of the cover (right), and remove the plastic cover.
20 GT-3 Series
7. Rotate the Lever (5) to your side that fixes the Print Head.
(5)
8. Mount the new Print Head on the printer. Fit the V-shaped groove (1) to the Positioning Pin (2) (right) at
the back of the mounting position.
Nozzle
surface (1) (2)
9. Hold the knob of the Print Head (3) (left) and push it downward so that the V-shaped groove can fit the
inside of the Positioning Pin (2). Push down the Print Head to fix the corner of the Print Head by the Flat
Spring (4) (right).
(2) (4)
3 Slide the Print Head into the Flat

Spring from the right to the left.
2
4
10. Rotate the Lever to fix the Print Head.
GT-3 Series 21
11. Remove the protection film.
12. Remove the black rubber cap on the edge of the Tube, connect the Tube to the Print Head and fix the
Tube by rotating the Tube Connector by 90 degrees.
13. Take off the gloves and connect the Flat Cable to the Carriage PCB. Put the Flat Cable with the terminal
(metal) side on the top (left), insert straight into the connector and fix it by pushing the tabs of both sides
(right).
<Important!>
Do not insert the Flat Cable at an angle in installation. The electric current may not be stable and
increase the Print Head temperature, which causes machine errors (e.g. “Head Temp High”), mis-firing,
and give serious damage to the Print Head. Do not repeat the insertion, or the terminal (metal) may be
damaged and may cause serious mis-firing.
Never wet the Connectors or other metal parts; it may short-circuit and damage the printer.
22 GT-3 Series
Repeat the steps 6 to 12 and mount all the Print Heads.
Color side
Color FFCs should go through the right side of the Tubes.
Tube
FFC area (right side of the Tube)
Run the FFCs through the back of the metal plate.
White side
White FFCs NEVER stay this area:
White FFCs must go through the inside of the Tubes.
If outside of the Tubes, then the Tubes may touch the
other parts while Carriage moving and should get
seriously damaged.
Color Tubes
FFCs area
K M C Y
W1 W2 W3 W4
W1 W2 W3 W4
White Connectors
Carriage PCB
<Note>
The photos above are all for GT-381. Mount only on CMYK for GT-341; mount on CMYK plus W1, W2 for
GT-361.
GT-3 Series 23
14. Mount the Plastic Cover over the Carriage PCB. Put it on the Carriage PCB in curl (left), and make the
Condenser (big black part on the Carriage PCB) go through the hole of the Plastic Cover (right).
15. Put the Plastic Cover so that the fold at the back should cover the metal plate under the Carriage PCB.
16. Put the two screws through the holes on the front side of the Plastic Cover (left), and apply the silicone
tubes to the screws that were removed in the step 6.
17. Put the claws on the Plastic Cover removed in the step 5 (left), and finally connect the Harness.
18. Push the Stop Lever to release the lock when you close the Front Cover with both hands.
24 GT-3 Series
2-5. Preparing your PC

This section describes how to install the GT-3 Printer Driver (FileOutput), manuals (Basic Operation Manual/
Instruction Manual), Brother GT-3 File Viewer, and other tools. Make sure the steps because there are some
different dialogs shown in Windows XP/ Vista / Windows 7 / Windows 8.
After those installations are over, install GT-3 Printer Driver (USB) by connecting USB 2.0 cable. Connect
with USB 2.0 Cable first and then connect to the LAN by following the steps in this Instruction Manual.
2-5-1. When you have GT-541/GT-782

You cannot print GT-3 print data (*.ar3) with GT-541/GT-782; the inside format has been changed. Likewise
you cannot print GT-541/GT-782 print data (*.arp) with GT-3.
2-5-2. PC preparation: For Windows XP (32 bit)

Install File Output Printer Driver "Brother GT-3 FileOutput" first to your PC.
Do not connect the printer to the PC at this stage.
<Note>
You must be logged on with Administrator rights on the PC.
1. Turn on your PC.

2. Close all open applications.
3. Insert the Install CD (included) to your PC.
Open the CD-ROM drive and double-click "Setup.exe”.
4. The Installer starts installation. Follow the indications of the dialogs.
<Note>
When you install to the PC that the printer drivers and tools are already installed, e.g. updating, the
message to confirm uninstallation appears. If you click "Yes", uninstallation starts to uninstall the
necessary tools but Printer Driver(s) is/are not uninstalled. If uninstallation fails, a dialog box appears
“Uninstallation of the former version failed. Do you want to continue installing the new version?” Click
[No] and quit the installer. Open "Add or Remove Programs" of Control Panel and remove "Brother
GT-3 Tools". Then start the installation from the beginning.
5. During the installation, the following warning appears. Click "Continue Anyway" and continue.
Windows XP
6. After installation, your PC will need to restart. Restart your PC. If you are going to use your printer without
connecting it to your PC, this will be the end of PC preparation.
GT-3 Series 25
2-5-3. Connection with USB 2.0 Cable: for Windows XP

1. Connect the USB 2.0 cable to your printer (power OFF).
<Note>
We do not recommend connection via a USB hub to the printer.
2. Connect the other end of the USB 2.0 Cable to your PC.
3. Turn on your GT-3 printer. The following window appears. Select "No, not this time”, and then click
“Next”.
4. Insert the Install CD. The following window appears.
(Continues to the next page)
26 GT-3 Series
5. Select “Install the software automatically (Recommended)”, and the click “Next”.
The installation starts. When "Hardware installation" dialog (not passed Windows Logo testing, see the
step 5 in “2-5-2”) appears during installation, Click "Continue Anyway". The installation continues.
<Note>
 If you connect the USB 2.0 cable anyway, the dialog to insert the install CD appears. Confirm that
the Install CD is inserted properly, and then click “OK”.
 If install CD is not in drive [D:], the following window appears. Click “Browse…” to select the CD drive,
select GT-3.gpd in [32bit_OS] the folder and then click “OK”. The installation continues.
6. Click "Finish" when "Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog.
7. Open "Printers and Faxes" in "Control Panel".
8. Click either "Brother GT-3" "Brother GT-3 FileOutput" icon and select "Set as Default Printer" on “File”
menu. This will help to do the layout with your application software.
The PC setup is now completed.
<Note> for installations of more than one GT-3 printer.

To connect another GT-3 to the PC, repeat the steps of "2-5-3. Connection with USB 2.0 Cable: for
Windows XP. From the second GT-3, the printer names automatically become “GT-3 (copy X)”. You can
change the names as "GT-3 xxx" (e.g. "GT-3 #2") in the “Printer and Faxes” in the “Control Panel” for
your workability.
GT-3 Series 27
2-5-4. Network Setting: For Windows XP

2-5-4-1. Assignment of your computer’s IP Address
<Note>
Jump to “2-5-4-2. Assignment of GT-3’s IP Address” if you r PC has already been assigned IP address.
1. Select [ Network and Internet Connection] in the Control Panel.
2. Select [ Network Connection ].
28 GT-3 Series
3. Select [ Local Area Connection ].
4. Click the [ Properties ] Button.
GT-3 Series 29
5. Select [ Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) ] and click the [ Properties] Button.
6. Assign the defined number of IP address, Subnet mask and Default gateway to your PC and click [ OK ] button.
(The numbers below are examples.)
30 GT-3 Series
2-5-4-2. Assignment of GT-3’s IP Address

Assign the GT-3’s IP address after you finish assigning your computer’s IP address.
1. Turn ON the GT-3 with your PC and GT-3 are connected with USB 2.0 cable. Execute the GT-3 Maintenance and
select [ IP address Assignment ]. Click the [ Next ] Button.
2. Assign the defined number of IP address, Subnet mask and Default gateway to GT-3,and click [ OK ] button. (The
numbers below are examples.)
GT-3 Series 31
3. IP address is successfully assigned to GT-3.
4. The error dialog appears if some irregular numbers are assigned as IP address in the step (2), Subset mask or
Default gateway. Confirm the numbers and re-enter.
32 GT-3 Series
2-5-4-3. GT-3 Setting on the LAN

1. Connect your PC with GT-3 with LAN cable and turn ON the printer.
Select [ Printers and Faxes ] and select [ File ] > [ Add Printer ].
2. The Wizard starts. Click the [ Next ] Button.
GT-3 Series 33
3. Select the [ Local printer attached to this computer ] and click the [ Next ] Button.
4. Select [ Create a new port] and [ Standard TCP/IP Port ] as the Type of port.
Click the [ Next ] Button.
34 GT-3 Series
5. The Wizard starts. Click the [ Next ] Button.
6. Input the IP address that you assigned in the Step (2) of “2-5-4-2. Assignment of GT-3’s IP Address” and click the
[ Next ] Button.
GT-3 Series 35
7. Wait for a while and then the dialog changes to the following [ Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard ]. Select
[ Custom ] in the Device Type and click the [ Settings… ] Button.
8. Select [ LRP ] in Protocol, input [ BINARY_P1 ] in Queue Name of LPR Settings, and click the [ OK ] Button.
9. The Wizard will soon go back to the Step 7 above. Click the [ Next ] Button.
36 GT-3 Series
10. [ Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard ] is finished. Click the [ Finish ] Button.
11. The dialog goes back to the [ Add Printer Wizard ] and the Install Printer Software starts. Click the [ Have Disk ]
Button.
GT-3 Series 37
12. Click the [ Browse… ] Button and select the [ 32bit_OS ] folder in the Installer, and then click the [ OK ] Button.
(Only 32 bit OS is available for Windows XP.)
13. Confirm that [ Brother GT-3 ] should be selected in the Printers, and click the [ Next ] Button.
38 GT-3 Series
14. Select [ Replace existing driver ] and click the [ Next ] Button.
15. The dialog shows "Set as Default Printer (better to select GT-3 File Output Printer Driver as Default
Printer)", “Share name: Not shared” and “Test Page: No” and click the [ Next ] Button.
16. The final dialog appears to show that GT-3 has successfully added to your PC. Click [ Finish ] Button to finish the
Wizard.
GT-3 Series 39
2-5-5. PC Preparation: For Windows Vista / Windows 7 / Windows 8 (32 bit / 64 bit)
Refer first to "2-5-2. PC preparation: For Windows XP (32 bit)" and confirm the process. Install the file Output
Printer Driver "Brother GT-3 FileOutput" first to your PC. Tools and manuals are installed together from Install
CD, and PC must be restarted. Then PC is connected to USB 2.0 cable, the printer turned ON, and USB 2.0
cable connected to the printer. Connect with USB 2.0 Cable first and then connect to the LAN by following the
steps in this Instruction Manual.
Install File Output Printer Driver "Brother GT-3 FileOutput" first to your PC
Do not connect the printer to the PC at this stage.
<Note> You must be logged on with Administrator rights on the PC.
1. Turn on your PC.

2. Close all open applications.
3. Insert the Install CD (included) to your PC.
Open the CD-ROM drive and double-click "Setup.exe".
4. The monitor turns dark and the following dialog appears when User Account Control is ON. Select
"Continue".
5. The Installer starts installation. Follow the indications of the dialogs.
40 GT-3 Series
6. During the installation, the following warning appears. Click "Install" and continue.
Windows 8
7. After installation, your PC will need to restart. Remove your Install CD and restart your PC. If you are going to
use your printer without connecting it to your PC, this will be the end of PC preparation.
2-5-6. Connection with USB 2.0 Cable: for Windows Vista / Windows 7 / Windows 8
1. Connect the USB 2.0 cable to your printer (power OFF).
2. Connect the other end of the USB 2.0 Cable to your PC.
3. Turn ON your GT-3 printer. Installation starts automatically. The information appears at the right
bottom of the PC monitor.
4. After installation, open "Printers" in "Control Panel" of PC.
5. Click either "Brother GT-3" or Brother GT-3 FileOutput icon and select "Set as Default Printer" on “File”
menu. This will help to do the layout with your application software. The PC setup is now completed.
GT-3 Series 41
2-5-7. Network Setting: For Windows Vista / Windows 7 / Windows 8

2-5-7-1. Assignment of your computer’s IP address
<Note>
Jump to “2-5-7-2. Assignment of GT-3’s IP Address” if you r PC has already been assigned IP address.
1. When your PC has not been assigned IP address, connect your PC to the Network with LAN cable first and then
select [ Network and Internet ] and select [ Network and Sharing Center ].
2. Select [ View status ] in the Local Area Connection where you are going to assign the IP address.
Windows 8
Connection: e.g. Ethernet
42 GT-3 Series
3. Click the [ Properties ] Button.
4. The following caution appears when [ User Account Control ] is ON. Select [ Continue ] Button to go next.
GT-3 Series 43
5. Select [ Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) ] and click the [ Properties ] Button.
6. Assign the defined number of IP address, Subnet mask and Default gateway to your PC and click [ OK ] button.
(The numbers below are examples.)
44 GT-3 Series
2-5-7-2. Assignment of GT-3’s IP Address

Assign the GT-3’s IP address after you finish assigning your computer’s IP address.
1. The following caution appears when [ User Account Control ] is ON. Select [ Allow ] Button to go next.
2. Turn ON the GT-3 with your PC and GT-3 are connected with USB 2.0 cable. Execute the GT-3 Maintenance and
select [ IP address Assignment ]. Click the [ Next ] Button.
GT-3 Series 45
3. Assign the defined number of IP address, Subnet mask and Default gateway to GT-3,and click [ OK ] button. (The
numbers below are examples.)
4. IP address is successfully assigned to GT-3.
5. The error dialog appears if some irregular numbers are assigned as IP address in the step 3, Subset mask or
Default gateway. Confirm the numbers and re-enter.
46 GT-3 Series
2-5-7-3. GT-3 Setting on the LAN

1. Connect your PC with GT-3 with LAN cable and turn ON the printer.
Windows Vista: Select [ Printers ] from the [ Control Panel ].

Windows 7: Select [ Devices and Printers ] from the [ Control Panel ].
Windows 8: Select [ View devices and printers ] from the [ Control Panel ].
Select [ Add a printer ].
2. Select [ Add a local printer].
GT-3 Series 47
3. Select [ Create a new port ] and [ Standard TCP/IP Port ] as the Type of port. Click the [ Next ] Button.
4. Input the IP address that you assigned in the Step (3) of “2-5-7-2. Assignment of GT-3’s IP Address”, and turn OFF
the check box [ Query the printer and automatically select the driver to use ]. Click the [ Next ] Button.
48 GT-3 Series
5. The following “Detecting TCP/IP Port” dialog appears and then it changes automatically to “Add
Printer”.
6. The message “The device is not found on the network” appears.

Select [ Custom ] and click the [ Settings… ] Button.
GT-3 Series 49
7. Select [ LRP ] in Protocol, input [ BINARY_P1 ] in Queue Name of LPR Settings, and click the [ OK ] Button.
8. The Wizard will soon go back to the Step 6. Click the [ Next ] Button.
50 GT-3 Series
9. The dialog goes back to the [ Add Printer ] and the Install Printer Software starts. Click the [ Have Disk ] Button.
10. Click the [ Browse… ] Button and select either [ 32bit_OS ] or [ 64bit_OS ] folder in the Installer
depending on your PC, and then click the [ OK ] Button.
GT-3 Series 51
11. Confirm that [ Brother GT-3 ] should be selected in the Printers, and click the [ Next ] Button.
12. Select [ Replace the current driver ] and click the [ Next ] Button.
13. The dialog shows “Printer Name”, "Set as Default Printer (better to select GT-3 File Output Printer Driver
as Default Printer)", “Share name: Not shared”. Click the [ Next ] Button.
52 GT-3 Series
14. The final dialog appears to show that GT-3 has successfully added to your PC. Click [ Finish ] Button to finish the
Wizard.
GT-3 Series 53
2-5-8. Troubleshooting
Confirm the following topics when you need to troubleshoot in PC setup.
2-5-8-1. Windows 7 / Windows 8 will not recognize the GT-3 Printer Driver after you
connect to your PC with USB cable
Issue:
The following may occur when you install the Brother GT-3 Printer Driver for the first time on your PC. If
the installation fails, Windows 7 / Windows 8 sometimes regard GT-3 as an "Unspecified Device".
If this is the case, you can see the error message at the right bottom of your desk top. (The icon and
message may differ depending on your Windows version).
Left Click on; Click here for details, in the pop-up window.
The following window appears. Close out of it to continue the installation
Open the Control Panel and click on the Devices and Printers icon.
You will see that the GT-3 is shown in the "Unspecified" category as seen on the following page. (The
icon and message may differ depending on your Windows version.)
(Following to the next page)
54 GT-3 Series
How to recover:
1. Open the Control Panel and select Devices and Printers icon. Select and Right-Click on the
Garment Printer (GT-3) in the “Unspecified" category and left click on Properties in the
drop-down menu.
GT-3 Series 55
2. The following Garment Printer Properties windows will be displayed. Click the Hardware tab and
select the Brother GT-3 in the "Device Functions:" list. Then left click on the Properties button on
the bottom right.
3. The following GT-3 Properties window will appear. Left click on the Change settings button on
the left bottom.
56 GT-3 Series
4. The Garment Printer Properties window for the BrotherGT-3 Properties disappears once and
then will return, possibly in a different position on your monitor. Sometimes the position of the Dialog
may shift. Click the Driver tab in the redisplayed window. Then click the Update Driver button.
You would not be able to click the Update Driver button on the Driver menu in the previous screen
because it is invalid there. Click the OK button.
5. Click Browse my computer for driver software when the following window appears.
GT-3 Series 57
6. Insert the GT-3 Installation CD in your PC driver and click the Browse button. Select the folder that
the printer driver is saved in, on the installation CD.
Select either [ 32bit_OS ] or [ 64bit_OS ] folder depending on your OS. The following image is an
example that the driver id is D: and Windows 32 bit OS. Click the Next button to continue.
<Note>
When you install the downloaded Printer Driver (Web version), the folder names are as follows:
select the necessary folder:
GT-3: [GT3Setup]
GT-782: [GT782 Setup_32bit] or [GT782Setup_64bit]
GT-541: [GT541 Setup_32bit] or [GT541Setup_64bit]
7. The installation of printer driver will start. After a while the following window appears.
The following screen appears when Windows 7 has successfully installed the printer driver. Check
the contents and click the Close button.
58 GT-3 Series
8. Open the Control Panel and click on the Devices and Printers icon to confirm that GT-3 is
successfully installed in the “Printers and Faxes" category.
If that window is kept open while updating, select View and Refresh to update the contents of the
written window.
9. The Brother GT-3 Printer Driver has been successfully recognized as a printer.
GT-3 Series 59
2-6. Preparation and Check before Use

2-6-1. Installing Ink Cartridge
There are two cases in mounting Ink Cartridges on the printer.
(1) Initial Ink Loading

When you uncrate the printer, the Filter Cartridges are installed instead of Ink Cartridges, to protect the
needles there. Follow the indication below: load the Maintenance Solution first by following the indications on
the Control Panel of loading the White Ink.
Keep the Filter Cartridges near the printer; they are necessary for the maintenance process of Tube Cleaning,
Print Head replacement and the power on of the printer. (Refer to “4-1-4. Cleaning the Tubes and Print
Heads”, “6-1-38. Replacing the Print Head”, “7-1. Transporting GT-3 Series / Maintenance Required for
Long-term Storage”).
(2) Replacing the Ink Cartridge

The ink indicator on the Display flashes when the Ink Cartridge is getting low. Prepare the new Ink Cartridge
(option*), and replace it when “Empty XXXX (color)” is displayed. （* See "2-1-4. Consumable Requirements
and Options" for part code.)
1. Open the new Ink Cartridge.
<Note>
Pigments in the White Ink are sinking little by little all the time. Hold the cartridge with both hands, upside
down from the mounted position, and shake it in 1-2 minutes so that the pigments inside can be mixed
enough. Do it one by one.
0054Y
2. Remove the Filter Cartridges from the slot of the printer. Put your finger to the handle and pull out the Ink
Cartridge.
<Note>
Leave the Filter Cartridges or the used Ink Cartridge installed until just before the replacement. Leaving
your printer with no Ink Cartridge installed may cause ink leakage or other serious damages.
0055Y
60 GT-3 Series
3. Confirm the direction and the color of the new Ink Cartridge and put the bottom edge on the base and
slide it to the back of the slot.
0056Y.0057Y
<Note>
Confirm the color of the ink cartridge. Loading a wrong color causes serious damage to print quality, and
could damage to the Print Heads. If you have installed a wrong color, immediately contact Brother or
your dealer for a service call.
<Note>
- Use Brother Ink Cartridge; see "2-1-4. Consumable Requirements and Options" for part code.
- Be careful not to get ink on your hands or clothing. Wash with soap if stained with ink. You cannot
wash away the stained ink on the material because the ink may be absorbed into the fiber.
- Do not replace cartridges while printing or head cleaning; is in operation it may cause damage to your
printer.
- Do not disassemble the Ink Cartridge.
- Replace the Maintenance Parts packed together with Cyan Ink Cartridge (380 cc /180 cc), Magenta
Ink Cartridge (380 cc)and White Ink Cartridge (380 cc) when you open the new one. Clean the Caps
and Wipers, replace the Wiper Cleaners, Fan Filter, Roller Felts (4), Flushing Plate Sponge (top) and
Flushing Plate Felt (bottom) according to our maintenance schedule to maintain good print quality.
Replace them when you see the warning indicated on the display too. Print quality may be reduced by
insufficient cleaning, e.g. dirty printed materials, mis-firing. See ”5. Regular Maintenance” or "6-1-2.
Replacing the Wiper Cleaner and Cleaning the Caps / Wipers", "6-1-3. Replacing Flushing Plate
Sponge and Flushing Plate Felt", "6-1-4. Replacing the Fan Filter", "6-1-5. Replacing the Roller Felts"
and "6-1-7. Cleaning the Encoder Strip" in the Instruction Manual for details.
- To keep the best print result, your printer will show empty status for the color cartridge that is empty.
To keep print quality, a small amount of ink remains to avoid damage to your printer.
GT-3 Series 61
2-6-2. Installing Ink

The following procedures are the steps of installing the Ink. Mount the Print Heads first by “2-4-1. Installing the
Print Heads” first.
Install the Color Ink on GT-341; both Color and White on GT-381 and GT-361.The process is not identical
between the Color and White. Confirm the process beforehand.
The Maintenance Solution should be installed before the White Ink. If the inside of the Tubes are dry, then the
White Ink will not run smoothly in the Tubes and very small bubbles will surely be produced, which may cause
serious missing nozzles in the test print.
Follow the procedures below for smooth and stable print quality.
Installing the White Ink (for GT-381 and GT-361)

When carrying out white tube cleaning, use a clean Bottle and fresh Maintenance Solution to avoid the risk of
blockages occurring inside the Print Head. When filling the bottle with the Maintenance Solution, be sure to
follow the instructions given below. Go to the procedure to installing the White Ink after you clean the Bottle.
1. Throw away the old maintenance solution first if there is some maintenance solution remaining inside the
Bottle, first discard the old maintenance solution.
2. Pour about 25 ml of fresh Maintenance Solution (2) into the Bottle (1), about half-way between the
bottom and the first line on the scale.
(1)
(2)
4725M
3. Tilt the Bottle (1) and rotate it about three times as shown in the illustration so that the Maintenance
Solution (2) flows around the base and sides inside the bottle to clean them.
<Note>
If you shake the Bottle with Maintenance Solution, bubbles will form and will not allow flowing around so
easily inside the bottle. Carry out the rinsing action gently so that the maintenance solution washes the
insides walls of the bottle.
(2)
(2)
(1)
4726M. 4727M
4. Tilt the top of the Bottle also as shown in the right figure and then rotate it three times in the same way as
described in step 3 above to clean the top and sides inside the Bottle.
5. Throw away the Maintenance Solution (2) which is inside the bottle.
6. Pour some maintenance solution into the bottle to use for carrying out tube cleaning. Carry out this step
quickly to avoid letting any dirt or other foreign particles get in at this time.
7. Fill the bottle with approx. 500cc Maintenance Solution. The printer cannot detect the volume of the
Maintenance Solution inside the Bottle. If the air goes into the Tubes and Print Heads with less
Maintenance Solution left in the Bottle, poor print quality will cause; missing nozzles will not be solved
easily in the test print.
62 GT-3 Series
8. Put on the Bottle on the Cover Cartridge.
0192Y
9. Confirm that the printer is either [ Standby ] or [ Ready ].

10. Select [ Maintenance ] > [ Initial Cleaning ] and ［ White ］from the menu and press OK Button.
11. When the Print Head (e.g. W1) is selected, the message [ Insert Maintenance Cartridge ] is indicated on
the Display. Remove the Filter Cartridge and insert the Maintenance Cartridge to W1 slot and press the
OK button.
Open the Cap of the Bottle and insert the Tube into the bottle. Confirm that the Tube reaches to the
bottom of the Bottle.
12. [ Close Air-in Cap ] is indicated. Confirm that the Air-in Cap is capped (closed) and press OK Button.
0193Y
13. The pump starts turning and the Maintenance Solution will be installed to the Tube. It takes approx. 50
seconds to introduce the Maintenance Solution.
14. After filling the Maintenance Solution, the message [ Insert Ink Cartridge ] is indicated on the Display.
Remove the Maintenance Cartridge and insert the well-agitated White Ink Cartridge to W1 slot. Confirm
the agitation by referring to “2-6-1. Installing Ink Cartridge”. Press the OK button.
15. Press the OK button to start. It takes approx. 2 minutes to install the White Ink. The pong sound rings and
the installation for W1 is finished successfully.
16. Repeat the steps 11 to 15 for the rest of the White Print Head. Execute W2, W3 and W4 for GT-381, W2
for GT-361. Confirm the amount of the Maintenance Solution in the Bottle and refill if necessary.
GT-3 Series 63
Installing the Color Ink

1. Remove the Color Filter Cartridges.
2. Insert the Color Ink Cartridges into the slots.
Confirm the color of the Label on the Cartridge Holder and the color of the ink cartridge. Insert them in the
proper slots.
3. Select [ Maintenance ] > [ Initial Cleaning ] from the menu and load the ink.
4. Select the color that you are going to install the Ink.
Select [ All Colors ] to install the four Color Inks in one time. The printer will install one by one; it takes
about 50 seconds to install one color. The pong sound rings and the installation for W1 is finished
successfully.
5. Select the color one by one when you install only one color. Repeat the process until you finish the
installation.
64 GT-3 Series
2-6-3. Test Print

You can identify which Print Head has the problem by using the Nozzle Check Pattern. Print it when some
"white" blank lines can be seen in the print data or white is not white enough.
1. Install the Platen 14 x 16.
<Note>
- When "Platen Lowering Set (option)" is used, put them back to the original parts or lay something on the
Platen.
- When you check the White print quality, use colored paper, clear plastic plate, etc.
2. Set the Platen height to the “A” position.
3. Place a sheet of paper (A4 or letter size) at the right corner of the Platen (1) as shown below. Use
adhesive tape to make the paper flat. You can use a T-shirt instead of paper.
(1)
0081Y
4. Select [ Test Print ] with the Up/Down Button from the menu and then press the OK Button.
5. Press the Up/Down Button to select either “Nozzle Check CMYK”, or "Nozzle Check White" and then
press the OK Button.
05e0030Y
6. Press the OK Button to start printing the Nozzle Check Pattern.
7. Check the printed pattern to identify which Print Head has the problem.
GT-3 Series 65
CMYK:
If there is stripes (arrow 1) or line breaks (arrow 2), the Print Head of the color (in the following example:
Magenta) has the problem. The Print Heads need to be cleaned (see “2-6-4. Head Cleaning”).
White:
Like CMYK shown in the previous page, the Print Heads of W1 W2 (GT-381: one in W1, two in W2) have the
problem. The Print Heads need to be cleaned (better to execute [ All Whites]). See “2-6-4. Head Cleaning”.
<Note>
GT-3 has multiple White Print Heads (4 on GT-381, 2 on GT-361) and mis-firing is not so severe compared
with the one with CMYK Print Heads. See the left print result on paper and some of the nozzles are not fired,
but the actual print quality on the right print on pretreated T-shirt is enough.
One or two Mis-firing with each Print Head (left) but the normal print (right) is OK
66 GT-3 Series
Execute Head Cleaning if you have the print as shown in the below:
Several continuous nozzles are The same positions printed by the

missing like a "band". multiple Print Heads are missing (W1
and W3).
2-6-4. Head Cleaning

Your printer automatically cleans its Print Heads every 24 prints (you can change the frequency; see “7-2-5.
Changing the Auto Cleaning Setting” in the Instruction Manual), or when your printer has not been used for
more than two hours. The auto-cleaning starts when you press the Print Button in these situations. However,
the auto-cleaning may not be enough and cannot solve print quality problems (e.g. stripes/ banding appears
on the printed image). Please do the "manual" head cleaning.
Using the Head Cleaning Button

1. Make sure your printer is either [ Standby ] or [ Ready ] mode.
2. Press the Head Cleaning Button.
3. Select either [ All Colors ], [ All Whites ] or [ All Print Heads ] from the menu by Up / Down Button and
press the OK Button. The message [ Head Cleaning…] appears and your printer starts "Normal" Head
Cleaning. Press the Stop Button to cancel.
The message returns to either [ Stand By ] or [ Ready ] when the Head Cleaning is finished.
Normal / Powerful Cleaning

1. Make sure your printer is either [ Standby ] or [ Ready ] mode.
2. Select [ Head Cleaning ] from the menu and press the OK Button.
3. Press the Up/Down Button to select “Head Cleaning”, and then press the OK Button. Select either
[ Normal Cleaning ] or [ Powerful Cleaning ] by Up/Down Button and press the OK Button. Refer to the
steps in "4-1. Checking the Cause of Misfiring”. After a long storage, or when you find ink tubes have
"empty air" space inside, execute "Initial" Head Cleaning in [ Maintenance ] menu first to replace all the
ink inside the tube. Select "Initial Cleaning" in "Maintenance" menu and execute Initial Head Cleaning.
04e0029Y
4. Press the Up/Down Button to select which Print Head (color) to clean (can select “All Colors” for Normal
mode), and then press the OK Button. Select either [ All Colors ] or [ All Whites ] if more than two Print
Heads of either CMYK or Whites have mis-firing at the same time.
The message “Head Cleaning…” appears and your printer starts cleaning the Print Heads.
The message changes to Print Head Selection menu when the head cleaning has been completed.
<Note>
Confirm the space in Waste Ink Tank before you execute Initial Cleaning. See “6-2-3. Waste Ink
Disposal” in the Instruction Manual.
GT-3 Series 67
2-6-5. Firing Adjustment of the Print Heads

When Print Head preparation is complete, adjust the firing timing to improve print quality. The Print Heads
operate bi-directionally, and therefore the timing of the firing is essential in order to obtain sharp, vibrant prints.
Failure to adjust the timing properly may result in a loss of detail such as single vertical straight lines being
printed as 2 lines. Consequently, printed images will become dull and hazy, and some colors will be granular
with dots of ink color. Due caution is thus advised when adjusting the timing.
Execute the Firing Adjustment in “GT-3 Maintenance Tool”.
Preparation
1. Prepare several sheets of A4 or letter-sized white paper in executing Color Print Head adjustment.
Prepare several sheets of A4 or letter-sized black paper in executing White Print Head adjustment.
2. Prepare a PC that GT-3 Printer Driver is installed; where the GT-3 Maintenance Tool is in [Brother GT-3
Tools].
Procedures
1. Confirm that the PC and the GT-3 Series printer is connected by USB cable directly. This operation
cannot be done via a print server.
2. Turn ON the printer.
If the Printer Driver installation has been started, be sure to complete the installation by the proper
procedures. (See “2-5. Preparing your PC”.)
3. Execute “GT-3 Maintenance Tool” and select [ Firing Adjustment ], and then click [ Next ].
4. Execute the adjustment four times as follows:
- 1200 dpi Color
- 1200 dpi White
- 600 dpi Color
- 600 dpi White
Select the one from the above four at [ Step 1: ] dialog.
It is necessary to complete all four adjustments. The display will change from “Not Done” to “Done” when
adjustment is complete, however, the display will return to “Not Done” again if the GT-3 Maintenance
Tool is executed.
5. The following dialog shows that the 1200 dpi Color is already executed.
68 GT-3 Series
6. For [Step 2:] to [Step 3:], follow the instructions displayed on the dialog and execute a test print. The
following examples are shown in Color adjustment; the same process for White adjustment.
7. Check the print result in [ Step 4: ].
The following are examples of prints (before adjustment) made at [Step 3:]. The pattern “2” print result
exhibits no checkerboard appearance and is the smoothest. Furthermore, the left vertical bars are also
displaced in the up and down directions.
Look at the print result for all colors and enter the number of the pattern that appears to be the most
uniform. In the above print result, for example, “2” in position K is the best.
Check the print result and enter the number for all four Print Heads.
GT-3 Series 69
8. For [Step 5:] to [Step 6:], follow the instructions displayed on the dialog, perform a test print again, and
check whether adjustment has been performed successfully.
If the pattern is uniform at number 4, 5 or 6, and 1 right vertical bar is visible, adjustment will be complete
for that combination of Platen and Print Head.
The example below shows a good print result.
9. The example below shows a bad print result.

If the pattern is uniform at numbers other than 4 to 6, the printed image is displaced in the up, down, left
or right directions (The Platen height may be too low.), and 2 right vertical bars are visible, readjustment
is necessary. Check whether the Platen height is [A], and the paper is flat.
70 GT-3 Series
10. At [Step 6:], select “YES” if adjustment is complete, or “NO” if incomplete.

If “YES” is selected, follow the dialog instructions and then click [Next].
If “NO” is selected, click the [Re-adjust] button that appears.
Return to [Step 1:] if “YES” is selected. Perform the adjustment procedure in the same way for the
remaining combinations of Print Head and Platen.
Return to [Step 4:] if “NO” is selected. Enter the previous print results again, follow the dialog instructions,
perform a test print, and then check the result. At [Step 6:], repeat the adjustment until the conditions
allow “YES” to be selected.
11. The adjustment of all four Print Heads is complete when the following dialog appears. .
GT-3 Series 71
2-6-6. Aligning the Print Position of White / Color Print Heads

When Firing Adjustment is complete, align the White and Color print positions.
On the GT-3 Series, the White Print Heads apply a base coat and the Color Print Heads are then used to
draw the design. For that reason, if the print positions of the White and Color are not perfectly aligned, the
base White Ink will be printed outside the target print surface, Color Ink will be applied to material to which no
White Ink has been applied, resulting in such problems as dull colors.
Align the white and color Head print positions using the GT-3 Maintenance in [Brother GT-3 Tools].
Preparation
1. Prepare a piece of dark-colored knitted cloth (or T-shirt).
2. Apply pretreatment solution to the cloth and then secure on the printer.
Procedures
1. Confirm that the PC and the GT-3 Series printer is connected by USB cable directly. This operation
cannot be done via a print server.
If the Printer Driver installation has been started, be sure to complete the installation by the proper
procedures. (See “2-5. Preparing your PC”.)
3. Execute “GT-3 Maintenance Tool” and select [ White/Color Alignment ], and then click [ Next ].
4. Execute the print test in [ Step 1:] and [ Step 2: ]. The print pattern is printed on the Top-Center position of
the 14x16 Platen.
Confirm the print result in [ Step 3: ].
Select the square with no white lines showing from the printed 13 x 13 matrix.
The following is an example of a test print performed at [Step 2:] (before adjustment). In this example, the
coordinates of the square with no white lines showing are [-4] in the X-axis, and [2] in the Y-axis.
72 GT-3 Series
5. Enter the coordinates of the selected square at the [ Step 3:] dialog and click [ Next ].
For [Step 4:] to [Step 5:], follow the instructions displayed on the dialog and print the test pattern again,
and check if the adjustment has been done successfully.
If the center square (X-axis coordinate [0], Y-axis coordinate [0]) is completely black with no white lines,
this shows that the alignment has been done correctly. Adjustment is now complete for this Platen.
The example below shows a good print result.
6.
GT-3 Series 73
In [ Step 5:], select “YES” if adjustment is complete, or “NO” if incomplete.

If “YES” is selected, follow the instructions on the dialog and then click [ Next ].
If “NO” is selected, click the [ Re-adjust ] button that appears.
The adjustment is complete when you select “YES” .

The menu returns to [ Step 3:] if “NO” is selected. Enter the previous print results again, follow the
instructions on the dialog, print a test pattern, and then check the result. At [Step 5:], repeat the
adjustment until the conditions allow “YES” to be selected.
The procedure is complete when the following dialog appears.
74 GT-3 Series
3. Operation
3. Operation
This section describes operation and adjustment selectable on the menu.
CAUTION
This printer should only be used by operators who are appropriately trained in its operation。
Ensure there is adequate space left for safe working. The Platen moves forward while operating and it may be
injured.
Do not handle the platen while printing. If your hand gets caught between the platen or the T-shirt tray and the
covers, it may be injured.
Wait at least 1 minute after turning off the power switch before opening the front cover.
Do not touch the head heat sink as it may be HOT and may cause a burn.
Be careful not to get your fingers caught when closing the front cover, otherwise it may result in injury to your
fingers.
Do not move the Platen by hand.

The Printer may be mechanically and electrically damaged.
Do not put your hands inside the covers while the printer’s power is turned on, otherwise your hands may touch
against moving parts and this may result in injury.
3-1. Menu
3-1-1. User Menu / Advanced Menu
There are two types of menu in the printer: [User Menu] and [Advanced Menu (service only)].
[User Menu] is for operators who do the business with the printer.
[Advanced Menu] is for service engineers who adjust and investigate the printer.
Go to Advanced Menu when you install or checking the printer.
Press any one of the OK, Up, Down, or Back Button to go to the User Menu.
Special operation is necessary to go to the Advanced Menu. Do not release these functions to customers.
3-1-2. Supplementary description of the User Menu

Refer to the Instruction Manual for each function of the User Menu.
The following pages show the additional information.
GT-3 Series 75
3. Operation
3-1-2-1. Test Print

There are the following Test Patterns saved in the printer. Use these Test Patters properly to find out the
solution. Some Test Patterns are saved in [Solid Print] of Advanced Menu. See the below pages.
No. Menu Print Position Description
1 Nozzle Check Color Confirms the missing nozzles (positions and
Right top of 14x1
2 Nozzle Check White numbers) of each Print Head.
3 Standard 600 Color

Confirms the print quality of each Print Head.
4 Standard 600 White Print this pattern to confirm the alignment (position)
of the Print Heads after you install.
Right top of 14x16
Confirm the print quality by investigating the output of
5 Standard 1200 Color this pattern if the printer has some issues: confirm the
difference with both 600dpi / 1200dpi.
6 Standard 1200 White
Confirms the whiteness with White Ink. Print on

pretreated cloth before you start production.
7 Whiteness Center top of 14x16 This is for reconfirming the whiteness after you
execute Daily Maintenance White, or other
maintenance.
8 Head Test Color
Center top of 14x16 Confirms the position of the damaged Print Head(s).
9 Head Test White
3-1-2-2. Maintenance Parts Exchange

The regular maintenance e.g. cleaning the inside and replacing the Maintenance Parts are necessary to keep
the printer in good conditions. Poor maintenance will surely cause serious issues, for example the printed
materials may be spoiled by dirty waste ink, poor print quality may produce bad prints, or even the machine
may be seriously damaged.
Explain the importance of the Maintenance and the how in installation the printer.
Generally an operator will exchange the Maintenance Parts to new when the open the new Ink Cartridge, the
warning message “Exchange Maintenance Parts” is indicated when the print volume is small, or the operator
will not care at all.
The warning message will soon turn to Error (error code: 1201) without proper maintenance and the printer
stops the operation, to prevent serious damage to the printer without the proper maintenance.
Warning Error
Execute the necessary maintenance when those messages are indicated:

 Replace the Wiper Cleaners to new
 Clean the Caps and Wipers
 Replace the Flushing Felt and Flushing Sponge to new
 Replace the Fan Filter to new
 Replace the Carriage Felts to new
76 GT-3 Series
3. Operation
Select [ Maintenance Parts Exchange ] and press OK Button. The Platen will be loaded and the Wipers will be
moved to the cleaning position. Follow the message and turn off the printer. Clean the inside and replace
those Maintenance Parts.
Refer to the 6-1-2 and the following sections in the “6-1. Replacing Consumables” of the Instruction Manual.
Follow the pages with customers in installation.
Turn ON the printer soon after the cleaning and replacing is finished. The Print Heads need to execute Head
Cleaning as soon as possible. The Print Heads have to be left uncapped and this may cause nozzle clogging
or other serious issues.
3-1-2-3. Tube Cleaning

 White Tubes (W1 - W4) need to be flushed the pigments left in the tube. Execute Tube Cleaning once a
week regularly.
 Color Tubes (CMYK) only need to execute Tube Cleaning when you check the cracks or damage or
replace the Tube(s), or you check the inside of the Print Head(s).
 Refer to “4-1-4. Cleaning the Tubes and Print Heads (White/Color Tube Cleaning) for details.
<Note>
There are [White Tube Cleaning] and [Color Tube Cleaning] in the menu. You can see the difference in the
table below:
Menu Usage
Regular weekly maintenance
White Tube Cleaning For storage (more than two weeks)
Checking and replacing the Tubes, Checking the inside of Print Head
Color Tube Cleaning Checking and replacing the Tubes, Checking the inside of Print Head
3-1-3. How to go to Advanced Menu

The following steps show how to go to the Advanced Menu.
Do not release these functions to customers.
1. Confirm the printer is either [Standby] or [Ready], not in operation.

2. Press any one of the OK, Up, Down, or Back Button to go to the User Menu.
3. Select [Version] from the menu by pressing Up/Down Buttons.
4. Press the Up Button as well as Down Button, and press Stop Button when the focus is on [Version] and
then the printer goes to the Advanced Menu.
5. The operation in the Advanced Menu is the same as the User Menu.
3-1-4. List of Advanced Menu

The following items are in the Advanced Menu.
No. Menu Description
1 CR Origin Sensor Adjustment Adjusts the Carriage Origin Sensor.
2 Firmware Update Firmware is upgrade/downgrade from the data in USB flash drive.
3 Output Check Confirms the output functions e.g. motor.
4 Input Check Confirms the input functions e.g. sensor.
5 Temperature Adjustment Adjusts the temperature in the environmental condition.
6 Solid Print Print the Solid Patterns to confirm the clogging of Print Head.
7 Log Level No operation necessary
Measures the suction of the pump in the Maintenance Unit. Check the
8 Pump Pressure function of the Maintenance Unit if the Waste Ink Tubes should leak or
be clogged.
GT-3 Series 77
3. Operation
3-1-5. Description of the Advanced Menu

The following pages show the additional information of the Advanced Menu.
Operate the buttons on the Panel as the User Menu.
3-1-5-1. CR Origin Sensor Adjustment

This menu adjusts the detecting position of the Origin Sensor; which defines the origin of the Carriage.
The Origin Sensor detects the sealed area on the Encoder Strip when you turn ON the printer. The position of
the sealed area has been adjusted in manufacturing but the position may shift by dismounting the Encoder
PCB and replacing the Encoder Strip. Execute this adjustment after you modify the printer. Be sure to execute
this after you replace the Main PCB.
Without this adjustment, the position of the Caps and print may shift in horizontal direction. If you find that only
the capping position should shift, adjust the position of the Maintenance Unit first.
3-1-5-2. Firmware Update

In general situation the firmware is upgraded from PC with “GT-3 Firmware Update”. Use this function when
PC is not available, or the firmware should be downgraded, which cannot be done with PC tool.
Refer to the “3-2. Firmware Update” for further information.
3-1-5-3. Output Check

This menu can operate some of the movable parts individually to confirm the output function of the printer.
The following menu is identical for all models; you can even activate the Solenoid Ink Ret_W Assy on the
GT-341.

1 Cap Test Moves up and down the Caps on the Maintenance Unit
2 Wiper Test Moves back and forth the Wipers on the Maintenance Unit
Moves the Carriage to “Capping position”, “Flushing position” and “the
3 Carriage Test
Center of the Platen”
Activates the Solenoid one by one: “Clearance Flap Solenoid, “White
4 Solenoid Test
Ink Retrieval Solenoid”, “Maintenance Unit Solenoid”
3-1-5-4. Input Check

This menu can show the status of some sensors to confirm if the sensor is available.
The following menu is identical for all models; you can even show the status of Wiper Cleaner if it is mounted.

Indicates the status ON/OFF of CR Origin Sensor, Clearance Flap,
Platen Origin, the position of Encoder Sensor and the value of
Temperature Sensor.
1 Carriage / Platen <Note>

The Caps are moved down automatically when you select this menu
and moved up automatically when you close this menu. This operation
is to make the Carriage free and confirm the position of the Encoder
Sensor.
Indicates the status ON/OFF of Wiper Origin Sensor, Cap Origin
2 Maintenance Unit
Sensor, Pump Rotation Sensor, Wiper Cleaner SW of White/Color.
78 GT-3 Series
3. Operation
3-1-5-5. Temperature Adjustment

The temperature sensor is mounted on the Carriage PCB to detect the environmental condition. This menu
adjusts the calculation of the temperature sensor.
The temperature sensor has been adjusted in manufacturing but adjust the value when you replace the
Carriage PCB and/or Main PCB.
The temperature is adjustable by 0.5C degree (1F degree), within the ±5C degrees.
3-1-5-6. Solid Print

The Solid Print patterns are available in the printer.
Print this when you confirm the Print Head clogging caused by cracked Tube. You can confirm the banding
issue with this pattern. Refer to “4-1-2. Heavy misfiring in printing (Checking Cracks inside the Tube)”.
The Solid Print pattern is printed almost the full size of 14x16 Platen. Bette to print on T-shirt rather than on
paper, because the ink volume is large and may cause “flood” on the paper.
Example: “Solid K” for Black
3-1-5-7. Log Level

This menu is to confirm the issues. Use it as-is: “Standard Information”. When you are requested by the
manufacturer, select “Detailed Information”, which can record in a very short period of time. Set the menu to
“Standard Information” soon after the necessary log data is exported.
GT-3 Series 79
3. Operation
3-1-5-8. Pump Pressure

This menu is to measure the pressure of the Tube Pump and to confirm the air leakage inside the
Maintenance Unit.
There are two methods below: choose by your conditions.
How to check the Pump (1)

1. Select the [Pump Pressure] in the Advanced Menu. Select [On Cap] then the Carriage will move to the
center of the Platen. Fill the Cap (1) of the target color with Maintenance Solution.
If you find the Maintenance Solution is being absorbed automatically into the Maintenance Unit, confirm if
the Waste Ink Tubes may be disconnected or damaged and leakage will occur.
Cap (1) :Yellow
2. Select the color you are going to confirm and press the OK button.
3. The Tube Pump will start to rotate. Confirm the Maintenance Solution inside the Cap; if it is absorbed into
the Maintenance Unit then the Waste Ink Tubes will be fine.
If you find the Maintenance Solution will not be absorbed (not move the surface), then the Waste Ink
Tube may be clogged or the Tube Pump may malfunction.
How to check the Pump (2)

1. Prepare a jig as shown in the photo to confirm the performance of the Pump Tube. Connect the Joint (2),
the Tube (φ2mm) of 60 cm long (3) and the Bottle with Maintenance Solution (4). The Joint (2) is not
used for GT-3 Series; Male Luer Slip to 2 00 Series Barb, 1/16 “(1.5 mm) ID Tubing MTLS210-6 made by
VALUE PLASTICS, INC. The max size of the connecting part is φ2.5mm. We made the Tube (3) with two
SB2548 Cap Tubes connecting SB0254 Tube Joint VRSC6. Use the Bottle (4) for Tube Cleaning.
2. Weight the Bottle with Maintenance Solution (4) before you start testing.
Approx. 2.5 mm
(3)
(2)
(4)
80 GT-3 Series
3. Operation
3. Select [Pump Pressure] in the Advanced Menu and select [On Carriage] and then the Carriage will move
to the center of the Platen. Insert the Joint into the Hole (5) of the Cap. The Bottle with Maintenance
Solution (4) should be on the table; or the volume of consumption may be different by the head pressure.
(5)
(4) (5)
4. Select the color you are going to confirm and press the OK button.
5. Weight the Bottle after the menu is finished.
=> The Tube Pump works properly if the current weight is decreased by approx. 38g from the original.
=> The Waste Ink Tubes may be clogged if the current weight is decreased by less than 30g from the
original. Or the Tube Pump may not work properly. Confirm the inside of the Maintenance Unit and
modify the parts (cleaning, exchanging parts).
GT-3 Series 81
3. Operation
3-2. Firmware Update

The following steps show how to update the firmware with USB Flash Drive. Refer to the Instruction Manual
as for the update with the “GT-3 Firmware Update” from your PC.
3-2-1. The difference between GT-3 Firmware Update (PC) and USB Flash Drive
The update data is “GT3FIRM****.bwf” (confirm the extension), which is the same either from PC tool or from
USB Flash Drive. The PC tool “GT-3 Firmware Update” can do only “upgrade” from the version installed on
PC, but you can “upgrade” “downgrade” the firmware with USB Flash Drive.
3-2-2. How to Update from USB Flash Drive

1. Copy the firmware data “GT3FIRM****.bwf” on the root folder of the USB Flash Drive. Do not copy more
than 10 versions in one USB Flash Drive, or the firmware data files will not be indicated on the Display.
2. Insert the USB Flash Drive to the printer and select [ Firmware Update ] in the Advanced Menu.
3. Select the file name you are going to update and press the OK Button. NEVER TURN OFF THE
FIRMWARE WHILE UPDATING. If the power is off while updating, go to the step “3-2-3” in the next page
and follow the steps.
4. The firmware is updated successfully when you see the message below in the Display.
5. Remove the USB Flash Drive and turn OFF and ON the printer.
82 GT-3 Series
3. Operation
3-2-3. Countermeasure for Cancelled Update

The following steps show how to countermeasure the irregular situations; unexpected troubles during
updating the firmware from both PC and USB Flash Drive (e.g. sudden power off, malfunction in reading USB
Flash Drive).
3-2-3-1. Confirmation of Cancelled conditions

Confirm the situation; the countermeasure depends on the discontinued conditions.
If you find the errors listed below, then the update of the main programs is finished successfully.
Message Data errors (Error Codes: 4200, 4201 and 4202)

Font Data errors (Error Codes: 4300, 4301, 4302）
Test Print Data errors (Error Codes: 4400, 4401 and 4402)
Maintenance PCB version errors (Error Code: 5260)
Go to the steps in“3-2-3-2”and continue the follow up.

The main program failed to update when you see the following message on the Display. Go to “3-2-3-3.” and
follow the steps there.
3-2-3-2. Restart the updates except Main program

Execute the update as usual with GT-3 Firmware Update from PC or with USB Flash Drive. The update of
other programs will be updated. The whole update is successfully finished with no errors indicated when you
turn OFF and ON after the update is finished.
3-2-3-3. Update with Boot System program

The Boot System program works when the update fails by unexpected situations and the Main program will
not work properly. The Boot System program temporarily reads the firmware data in the USB Flash Drive and
start the operation of GT-3. Follow the steps below and re-update the firmware.
1. Prepare the previous version of firmware (one-version downgrade), named as ‘GT3FIRM.bwf’, and then
make a copy in the root folder of the USB Flash Drive.
2. Make a copy of the firmware that you are going to update on the root folder of the same USB Flash Drive.
3. Make sure that the printer is powered OFF. Insert the USB Flash Drive into the printer, and turn ON the
printer. The printer starts the operation with booting ‘GT3FIRM.bwf’. If any error occurs, press OK Button
to release the errors. (If you cannot escape from other errors, turn OFF the printer and remove the errors
by following the Error Code and the message.)
4. Go to the Advanced Menu and select [Firmware Update].
5. Select the firmware that you are going to update originally and press the OK Button. No update is done if
you select the same version.
6. The update is finished when the message is shown on the Display properly. Turn OFF the printer.
7. Remove the USB Flash Drive from the printer and then turn ON the printer again. Confirm the version.
GT-3 Series 83
3. Operation
3-2-3-4. Upgrade in Flash ROM writing error

This error shows when the firmware former than version 1.20 failed to write the Log info. Once this error
shows then it surely occurs in every initialization. Be sure to upgrade the firmware to the current version.
1. Make copy of the new firmware named as“GT3FIRM.bwf”in the root folder of the USB flash drive.
2. Insert the USB flash drive and turn ON the printer with pressing the Print Button.
3. Keep pressing the Print Button until the initial dialog (logo) is indicated on the Display, and the printer will
boot with the firmware “GT3FIRM.bwf”in the USB flash drive and then the issued program will be
overwritten.
4. After the printer is successfully initialized, remove the USB flash drive and turn OFF, and then turn ON
the printer again.
5. The firmware in the printer is still the old version. Upgrade the firmware in the normal way, eiher from PC
or from USB flash drive to the current version.
84 GT-3 Series
3. Operation
3-3. GT-3 Service Tool

GT-3 Service Tool is for service technicians only, which is not provided to customers.
GT-3 Service Tool has functions below:
• Adjusts the parts available for the printer after replacement.
• Adjusts the time of the printer.
• Views the Log info acquired from the printer.
• Resets the warning message of Tube Cleaning White.
Refer to “6-1. Replacing the Printer Parts” for details of adjustment after replacing parts.
Refer to “3-4. Getting Log File and Analysis” for details in viewing Log file.
The resetting of the warning message of Tube Cleaning White is described below.
3-3-1. Precautions of using GT-3 Service Tool

• To use GT-3 Service Tool, the printer driver must be installed on the PC.
• It is recommended that GT-3 Service Tool be copied to and used from a USB memory device. GT-3 Service
Tool can be run directly from “writeable removable media” such as USB memory devices and
CompactFlash.
• If storing and carrying around GT-3 Service Tool on a CD-R or DVD-R, it is necessary to copy it to the PC
hard drive in order to use it. If copying GT-3 Service Tool to the customer’s PC, always delete after use.
Never leave GT-3 Service Tool on a customer’s PC or provide the tool to a customer. This is to prevent
adverse influence on GT-3 operation or print quality as a result of incorrect use。
• The widow of GT-3 Service Tool is always displayed in English, regardless of the language selected when
installing the printer driver. (However, the screen is displayed in Japanese only on PC s running on a
Japanese Windows version.)
3-3-2. Resetting "Clean Tube W" Warning

It is necessary to clean white ink tubes approximately once a week. Refer to “5-1-3. White Ink Maintenance”
for details of white ink maintenance. A “Clean Tube W*” (* is a value from 1 to 4 with GT-381, 1 or 2 with
GT-361.) warning message will be displayed on the right panel of GT-3 when approximately one week has
elapsed since white ink maintenance was last performed. This message is normally cleared by performing
white ink maintenance (Correctly speaking, the message disappears when execution is complete at the “Tube
Cleaning” menu.)
Use the GT-3 Service Tool in order to clear the “Clean Tube W*” message if Tube Cleaning is not performed
under any circumstances at such times as immediately after installing the GT-3 at the customer’s facilities.
<Important>
In order to maintain good print quality or avoid any Tube or Head trouble, it is necessary to perform white ink
maintenance. The "Clean Tube W*" message should not be forcibly cleared under normal circumstances.
Preparation
Store GT-3 ServiceTool in a USB memory device etc. and then connect it to the PC.
If the GT-3 printer driver is not installed on the PC, first complete the installation.
Procedure
1. Ensure that the PC is connected directly to GT-3 with a USB cable.
<Note>
This adjustment is not possible if connected via a USB print server.

<Note>
Always complete the printer driver installation once it has been started.
GT-3 Series 85
3. Operation
3. Start GT-3 Service Tool and select “Reset the warning Clean Tube W”, and then click [Next].
4. Check the instructions shown in the dialog box and then click [Next].
5. Select the printer in accordance with the explanation given in the dialog box and then click [Next].
<Note> It is only possible to select GT-3 printer(s) that are turned ON and are connected to a PC with a
USB cable. If two or more printers are connected to the PC, select the one for which operation is to be
performed.
6. Click [Next] again to reset.

7. Click [Next] again to return to the initial dialog.
<Note> Confirm that the "Clean Tube W*" message has disappeared from the right panel on the GT-3.
3-3-3. Demonstration Mode

By adding “Demo” to the beginning of the GT-3 Service Tool executable filename, the tool switches to “Off-line
Demonstration Mode” to allow the tool functions and specifications to be checked.
Normal file name GT3ServiceTool.exe

File name in demonstration mode DemoGT3ServiceTool.exe
3-4. Getting Log File and Analysis

3-4-1. Precautions of getting Log File
The way to get Log file from the GT-3 printer is to select [Log copy to USB] of the menu of the printer and write
the Log File to USB flash drive.
<Note>
It will take 5 to 10 minutes to write the Log data to the USB flash drive. The size of the Log File is approximately
7 Mb.
Execute GT-3 Service Tool on PC to view the Log file.
<Important>
Log files contain information such as the amount of ink used, the number of prints, and panel
operation records. Before acquiring logs from the customer’s GT-3, explain to customers and make
sure they understand that “log files are used only to analyze trouble and gain an understanding of the
operating status, and are not to be used for purposes other than these”.
86 GT-3 Series
3. Operation
3-4-2. Getting Log File

Please ask your customer to get Log file for troubleshooting. Insert the USB flash diver to save the Log data
into the file (*.log or *.zlg). Zip the Log file when you send by mail.
1. Insert the USB flash drive into the Slot in front of the Operation Panel.
2. Press one of the Up / Down / Back / OK Button to enter the menu.
3. Select [Maintenance] > [Log Copy to USB] with the Up / Down Button and press the OK Button. The
following message will be indicated.
16e0041Y
4. The log data is being saved to the USB flash drive while the Print Button is blinking. Wait for a while after
the Print Button stops blinking and the printer bells.
5. Make a copy of the log file saved in the USB flash drive and send it to the technical service.
<Note>
Do not touch the USB flash drive while the Print Button is flashing; it may destroy the saved data.
3-4-3. View Log File with GT-3 Service Tool

Preparation
Prepare the PC with GT-3 Service Tool and the log file.
You do not have to install GT-3 Printer Driver in your PC or the actual printer if you just view the Log File.
1. Execute the GT-3 Service Tool and select [View Log and Settings in Saved Log File] and click [Next].
GT-3 Series 87
3. Operation
2. Click the [Browse...] Button to select the Log file and click [Next].
3. Select the Buttons so you can view the log file from different viewpoint.
<Note>
The time recorded in the Log file is by the internal clock inside the GT-3 Series. The time may be shifted
from the real operation time.
4. Click [Finish] and then the GT-3 Service Tool is closed.
88 GT-3 Series
4. Solving Print Quality Problems

This chapter describes how to solve print quality problems.
CAUTION
This printer should only be used by operators who are appropriately trained in its operation.
Ensure there is adequate space left for safe working. The Platen moves forward while operating and
it may be injured.
Do not handle the platen while printing. If your hand gets caught between the platen or the T-shirt
tray and the covers, it may be injured.
Do not touch the head heat sink as it may be HOT and may cause a bum.
Be careful not to get your fingers caught when closing the front cover, otherwise it may result in injury
to your fingers.
Do not move the Platen by hand. The Printer may be seriously damaged by this.
Do not put your hands inside the covers while the printer’s power is turned on, otherwise your hands
may touch against moving parts and this may result in injury.
GT-3 Series 89
4-1. Checking the Cause of Misfiring

The following shows how to troubleshoot.
Refer to “7-2. Solving Print Quality Problems “ in the Instruction Manual.
Troubleshooting Flow
Analyze the cause of the misfiring / poor print quality by following the Flow below.
HC = head Cleaning
CP = Check Pattern First of all, confirm the temperature and humidity, power (the ground,
Solid = Solid Pattern noise) and ask how your customer has done for maintenance (Head
Cleaning, Wiper and Caps, Wiper Cleaner).
Start Ask when the problem starts and how frequently it occurs,
improved or not.
Print Nozzle CP Confirm if the ink is enough in the Ink Cartridge.
YES NO
misfiring？ Print Standard CP
Uneven or NO
YES scattering?
1 out of 4 or NO
NO
While printing?
almost none?
Better after
OFF/ON?
YES Do Normal HC YES
YES
Print Nozzle CP
Turn OFF/ON NO
Electrical Check Electrical Check
"missing
YES NO Almost no
Dried?
band"? NO misfiring?
NO YES
YES Increase Increase wipe YES
Fixed nozzle?
humidity in printing
NO
Air inside, Wait 10 min Surface Check with mirror, Clean Wiper and Caps
Replace Wiper Cleaner, Clean Nozzles, Do Powerful HC NO
Normal HC Solid？
Filter YES
Nozzle CP 印刷 Warning?
Replace
YES NO NO
Better? YES
YES No good Solid Pattern shows print head

Leave long?
clogging by Tube crack, NG Ink Cartridge
(empty, frozen, etc.) Filter clogging, or air
Check ink in cap just after moving NO in the Tube.
pump and waste ink tubes.
Do Normal HC, Print Nozzle CP for several times. Repair！

CR position, Waste Ink Tube and pump in
Maintenance Unit, Replace Heads and Tubes.
Better?
NO
YES
Print OK
90 GT-3 Series
4-1-1. Detailed Check Flow

If misfiring occurs, determine the cause by following the procedures in Flow 1 to 6 on the following pages as
necessary. If the problem remains unresolved, replace the Print Head.
<Note>
・ After head cleaning, print a check pattern again to verify whether misfiring occurs at the same position
(fixed nozzle). If misfiring occurs at a different position, the problem is not related to the Print Head.
・ Check the Ink inside the Ink Cartridge if it remains enough for operation. Ink Sensor Failure may not
sense “Ink Empty” although the Ink Cartridge is really empty. Or ink bag inside the Ink Cartridge may be
bent.
・ Sometimes after a long leave (especially no Wash Liquid inside the Waste Ink Tube) waste ink may be
clogged inside the Maintenance Unit and no ink may flow in Head Cleaning. Check the Caps just after the
Head Cleaning if there is ink remained in the cap or not. If not, clean the Waste Ink Tubes of Maintenance
Unit. Refer to "6-1-16. Assembling / Disassembling of the Maintenance Unit" and "6-1-19. Pump Tube".
・ The following check items are not related to misfiring on Print Heads other than the problematic Print
Head being investigated.
・ The print condition may become faint at both edges if the GT-3 is installed in an extremely dry
location. Refer to “4-1-3. Faded Print by Dryness (Changing the Wipe Frequency)”.
・ Check if the Carriage moving area and the surroundings of the Print Head are dirty. The Print Head
Nozzle surface is extremely delicate, and therefore contact between the Print Head and frayed thread
on the black Flushing Plate or Platen Sheet, or waste thread or dust around the Print Head Caps may
result in misfiring. Refer to “5-1-1. Cleaning the Print Head Caps and Wiper Blades" and "5-1-2.
Cleaning the Print Head Nozzle".
・ The following problems cannot be checked by referring to these check flows:

・ PCB defects
・ Clogging in Maintenance Pump Tube, Suction Tube, or Branch Plugs
・ “FFC” in the following diagrams refers to Flat Cables and “PH” refers to Print Heads.
GT-3 Series 91
Flow 1 (Some device around the Print Head causes misfiring?)
Misfiring occurs.
<Cannot be resolved by Head cleaning.>
Check if the Wiper Cleaner Cassette is dirty and replace with a new one if required.
Check for any looseness or bending at the Tube and Head connections.
Clean the Wiper Blade if dirty, or replace if broken.
Exchange the M/Y Filter if the warning is indicated.
YES Is the FFC folded or damaged? Is

there any peeling at the edges?
NO Remove the Wiper Cleaner, and

Replace the FFC.
check if the bottom of the Wiper
Blade moves when the top is pushed.
YES If it moves, the Wiper Blade has
Replace the Has the Wiper come off.
Wiper Blade Blade come off?
NO
Has ink been installed on YES

Go to Flow 2.
the new Print Heads?
NO
Print a check pattern and count the number of misfiring nozzles.
5 or more nozzles misfiring? YES

Go to Flow 4.
NO
Execute “Powerful” cleaning (up to 5 times).
Max. 12.5 cc of ink used.
Print a check pattern and count the number of misfiring nozzles.
NO
All nozzles firing?
Repeating "Powerful" Head
YES cleaning 5 times does not
resolve the problem.
Go to Flow 3.
Problem solved.
(No PH replacement)
92 GT-3 Series
Flow 2 (Electrical issue?)
From previous flow
All nozzles YES Are FFCs YES

misfiring? connected Go to Flow 4.
properly?
NO
NO
Clean the Print Head by Tube
Cleaning (See “4-1-4”.)
Execute “Powerful” cleaning Print check pattern after All nozzles YES
(up to 10 times). reconnecting FFCs. firing?
Max. 25 cc of ink used. NO
Print a check pattern and count

the number of misfiring nozzles. Problem solved.
(No PH replacement)
Repeating "Powerful"
cleaning 10 times does not
NO All nozzles resolve the problem.
firing?
Tube Cleaning
YES
Load Ink 10 cc of ink used.
Problem solved. YES

All nozzles firing?
(No PH replacement)
NO
Execute “Powerful” cleaning

(up to 5 times).
Max. 25 cc of ink used.

the number of misfiring nozzles.
NO
All nozzles firing? Go to Flow 4.
Problem solved.
(No PH replacement)
GT-3 Series 93
Flow 3 (Fixed nozzle(s)?)
From previous flow There is no problem with

the Print Heads, however,
there may be on other
parts.
NO Always more NO Problem solved.

Is the same nozzle(s)
than 5 nozzles (No PH replacement)
always misfiring? misfiring?
YES YES
Clean the Wiper and Print Head Cap.
The Print Head may leak. Replace the Wiper Cleaner.
Replace the Print Head.
Clean the nozzle surface and NO
install ink again.
Is the same
10 cc of ink used. nozzle(s) always
misfiring?
Wipe the Nozzle
with Clean Execute “Powerful” cleaning
Applicator (round) (up to 10 times)
soaked with Wash YES
Liquid. Max. 25 cc of ink used.
The fixed nozzle is still

misfiring.
Print a check pattern and count Replace the Print Head.
All nozzles firing? NO the number of misfiring nozzles.
YES
The Print Head Nozzle
is clogged, or there is
an electrical problem
with the Print Head.
NO
Problem solved. All nozzles firing?
(No PH replacement)
cleaning 10 times does
YES not resolve the problem.
Problem solved.
(No PH replacement)
94 GT-3 Series
Flow 4 (Clogging inside the Print Head?)
From previous flow
The Maintenance unit, Ink Supply Tube, or Ink

Supply unit may be faulty.
Print a solid pattern on A3 paper after “Powerful” Head cleaning. All nozzles
misfiring?
NO YES
Filter new?
NO
YES
Exchange Filter
Significant misfiring Ink may not be filled properly.

immediately after printing Go to Flow 5.
started? NO
Remaining ink qty may not
YES be measured correctly.
Is weight of current Ink

YES
Cartridge 250 g or
more?
NO Is the Ink Supply NO

Tube bent?
Insert a new Ink Cartridge, execute “Powerful”

cleaning, and then print a solid pattern.
YES
2.5 cc of ink used. Straighten the Tube, execute
YES “Powerful” cleaning, and then print a
solid pattern.
2.5 cc of ink used.
NO Significant misfiring
immediately after Tube clogging
printing started? Replace Print Head and
Ink Supply Tube.
Significant misfiring
No problem with Ink Supply unit. immediately after
NO printing started? YES
Powerful Cleaning
(up to 5 times) Go to Flow 6 to
Max. 12.5 cc of ink used. replace Filter.

NO
All nozzles firing?
cleaning 5 times does
YES
not resolve the
Go to Flow 3.
Problem solved. problem.
(No PH replacement)
GT-3 Series 95
Flow 5 (Maintenance Unit causes misfiring?)
Check if the Plate Spring and Front Head Hold Spring used to
From previous flow
secure the Print Head are properly secured, and if they are in
contact with the rear Positioning Pin properly.
Confirm if any objects behind the PH.

PH Alignment shifts YES Adjust by checking the actual Nozzle Check
vertically? Pattern for alignment.
NO
Remove the Wiper Cleaner Cassette and check if the

Print Head and Print Head Cap rubber position is OK.
NO Adjust the vertical positioning of the

Position OK?
Print Head and Print Head Cap rubber.
YES
Open the Rear Cover DB and remove the Tube Pump.

Execute “Powerful” cleaning and check
if ink flows to the Tube Pump Tube.
NO 2.5 cc of ink used.

Is Tube Pump Tube
cracked? <Procedure>
1. Remove ink in the Print Head Cap.
2. Execute “Powerful” cleaning.
YES Check Solenoid noise 3. Suction OK if ink remaining in Print
Cracks may
during Head cleaning. No Head Cap. If not, issue is in Tube
cause ink problem after 5 times? Pump.
leakage. Replace Tube YES
and Pump Tube
NO
Faulty Solenoid
Ink remaining in
Print Head Cap?
There is no problem with YES
the Maintenance unit.
NO
Connect the Print Head Cap and Tube

Pump Tube, and check the connection
between the Tubes.
Max. 12.5 cc of ink

used. YES
Execute “Powerful” head
The Pump Tube is
cleaning (up to 5 times). clogged. Connection
Replace Tube. OK?
NO
Connect PH and Tube
Pump Tube.
All nozzles
Go to Flow 3.
firing?
NO Repeating "Powerful" Head
Problem solved.
(No PH replacement)
96 GT-3 Series
Flow 6 (After LC Filter was exchanged)
Replacing LC Filter and Initial Cleaning
Print Nozzle CP
Execute Initial cleaning

until the air bubbles YES
All nozzles
should go into the PH. Problem solved.
firing?
(No PH replacement)
NO
YES Loose connection of

Tubes and Joints?
NO
Wait 10 minutes to remove air.

Execute “Powerful” cleaning and print
Nozzle CP
Up to 10 times,
Max. 25 cc of ink used
All nozzles YES Problem solved.

firing? (No PH replacement)
NO
Replace the Print Head.
GT-3 Series 97
4-1-2. Heavy misfiring in printing（Checking Cracks inside the Tube）

The ink may gel when the Tube kinks or twists, which will soon cover the Filter inside the Print Head, which
causes huge numbers of misfiring. With the frozen or expired ink may cause this issue. The gel is floating over
the Filter so the missing nozzles may occur only with the big print. Confirm this issue by the following
instruction steps.
1. Place a sheet of A3-sized paper in the center of the Platen as shown in the photograph below.
As the paper absorbs ink it will curl up and contact the Print Heads. This should be prevented by
adjusting the Platen height to position “C”.
Use adhesive tape at corners and edges to make the paper flat.
2. Load the solid print pattern to the printer from the Advanced Menu. Display the Advanced Menu from the
left Operation Panel to check the color Tubes, and from the right Operation Panel to check the white
Tubes. Next select “Solid Print”, followed by “Solid_K (black)”, “Solid_M (magenta)”, “Solid_C (cyan)”,
“Solid_Y (yellow)”, or “Solid_W* (white, *: 1 to 4)”. By pressing the OK button, the solid print pattern is
loaded and “Ready” appears on the display. (The example shown below is for a black pattern.)
Example: Solid K (Black pattern)
98 GT-3 Series
3. Check the print result.

If misfiring occurs immediately after starting printing and the result is similar to a barcode as shown below,
execute the countermeasures A to D below.
[A] If the Ink Cartridge is nearly empty (the indicator on the Display is blinking):
1. Replace the Ink Cartridge with a new one. (Refer to “2-6-1. Installing Ink Cartridge”.)
2. Execute “Powerful” cleaning. (Refer to “2-6-3. Test Print”.)
3. Print the A3-sized solid print pattern (Solid K. Solid M, Solid C, Solid Y or Solid W*) again.
4. The problem is resolved if stripes no longer appear.
[B] Filter Life expired:

1. Replace the Filter of the issued Print Head. (Refer to “6-1-33. Replacing the Filter on the Print Head”.)
2. If the issue recurs after replacing the Filter to new, there may be high possibility of ink gel caused by
Tube cracks. Replace the Tube by referring to “6-1-35. Tubes”.
[C] Print Head issue:

Replace the Print Head that has an issue.
(Refer to “6-1-33. Replacing the Filter on the Print Head” and “6-1-35. Tubes”.)
[D] Tube is bent or twisted, or cracked inside:

1. Replace the Tube. (Refer to “6-1-35. Tubes.”)
2. Print Nozzle Check Pattern (Refer to “2-6-3. Test Print”) and confirm the print quality of the Print Head.
3. Print the A3-sized solid print pattern (Solid K. Solid M, Solid C, Solid Y or Solid W*) again.
4. The troubleshooting is done successfully when no banding occurs.
GT-3 Series 99
4-1-3. Faded Print by Dryness (Changing the Wipe Frequency)

The print condition may be almost faint at both edges if using the GT-3 in a dry environment (humidity less
than 45%). This problem can be resolved by increasing the wipe frequency during printing. However, the time
required to complete printing will increase by the amount of extra time spent on wiping.
Use of a humidifier is recommended if dryness is believed to be the cause of misfiring or print defects. Explain
the following procedure to customers if resolving the problem by increasing the wipe frequency.
1. Select [ Printer Setting ] > [ Flushing Interval ] in the menu.
11e0035Y
2. Select one of the four:

・Every 52 lines
Under very high humid condition, if you reduce the print time.
・Every 40 lines
Default and standard setting
・Every 20 lines
Try this setting; wipe double than the standard setting.
・Every 10 lines
Wipe every 10 lines, most effective but the print time will be the longest.
11e0036Y
3. Press OK button and then the Display shows either [Standby] or [Ready]. The setting is modified. This
setting is effective until you change next time.
<Note>
Decrease the Flushing Interval (=increase the number of Flushing) with [Flushing Interval] menu when the
print quality is not good while printing. On the other hand, increase the Flushing Volume with [Flushing
Volume] menu when the print quality is not good at the beginning of the print.
100 GT-3 Series

4-1-4. Cleaning the Tubes and Print Heads (white/Color Tube Cleaning)
 White Tubes (W1 - W4) need to be flushed the pigments left in the tube. Execute Tube Cleaning once a
week regularly.
 Color Tubes (CMYK) only need to execute Tube Cleaning when you check the cracks or damage or
replace the Tube(s), or you check the inside of the Print Head(s).
<Note>
There are [White Tube Cleaning] and [Color Tube Cleaning] in the menu. You can see the difference in the
table below:
Menu Usage
Regular weekly maintenance
White Tube Cleaning For storage (more than two weeks)
Checking and replacing the Tubes, Checking the inside of Print Head
Color Tube Cleaning Checking and replacing the Tubes, Checking the inside of Print Head
When you execute White/Color Tube Cleaning, be sure to use the clean bottle and fresh Maintenance
Solution; follow the steps below when you fill in the bottle. Clean the inside regularly.
1. Throw away the old Maintenance Solution (1) left in the bottle.
2. Pour some fresh Maintenance Solution by 25 ml (about half of the lowest mark).
(1)
4725M
3. Rotate the bottle as shown in the image below by three times, to rinse the bottom, the side of the bottle
with the Maintenance Solution.
<Note>
Do not shake the bottle; the bubbles cannot flush the surface of the bottles easily. Just rotate the bottle
slowly to rinse the inside.
4726M
GT-3 Series 101

4. Lift up the bottom of the bottle, and rotate it by three times to rinse the top and the side of the bottle.
4727M
5. Throw away the Maintenance Solution from the bottle.

6. Fill the Maintenance Solution into the bottle for Tube Cleaning. Pay attention not to put dust inside the
cleaned bottle.
<Note> Keep the 250 ml of Maintenance Solution inside the bottle to execute Tube Cleaning for one print
head.
7. Execute White/Color Tube Cleaning. See the sequence below.

8. After the Tube Cleaning is done, keep the bottle in a clean condition; Cover it with a clean bag (polyester)
from the top.
A. White Tube Cleaning (Once a week)
<Note>
Confirm the firmware should be ver. 2.10 or higher.
This menu washes away the pigments inside the Tubes and Print Heads. When you execute this menu
all-in-one time, GT-381 for four Tubes, GT-361 for two Tubes, you can retrieve the White Ink before Tube
Cleaning. It takes time but you can save the cost. If you select the Tube one by one then the White Ink will not
be retrieved. Follow the indications on the Display and operate with Maintenance Cartridge.
<Note>
If you leave GT-3 printer unused for more than two weeks, execute White Tube Cleaning for storage. Insert
Capping Cartridges (option) in place of White Ink Cartridge. See "7-2. Required Maintenance for the Long
Storage".
All Whites Tube Cleaning
Sequence of All Whites Tube Cleaning (firmware ver. 2.10 or higher)

All Whites： Insert White Ink
Set Maintenance Tube Set Filter Load Mainte-
Retrieving Cartridge Cleaning Cartridge nance Solution Cartridge or Capping
White Ink Cartridge
Repeats the steps four times for GT-381(W1-W4), two times for GT-361 (W1, W2)
<Note>
If you execute Tube Cleaning one by one, then the first "Retrieving White Ink" is skipped.
Insert Capping Cartridges (option) in place of White Ink Cartridge when you leave the GT-3 printer unused for
more than two weeks.
1. Fill the bottle with Maintenance Solution. Confirm that at least more than 250 ml per one Print Head is in
the bottle.
2. Confirm in advance the amount of the Waste Ink in the Waste Ink Tank (more than 500 ml).
4. Select [ Maintenance ] > [ White Tube Cleaning ] from the menu and press OK Button.
5. Select [ All Whites ] then White Ink retrieval starts and the countdown is indicated on the Display. Please
wait until the retrieval finishes (4 minutes).
102 GT-3 Series

6. When White Ink retrieval is finished, the message [ Set Maintenance Cartridge ] is indicated on the
Display. Remove the White Ink Cartridge of W1 and insert the Maintenance Cartridge to W1 slot and
press OK Button. Confirm that the tube of the Maintenance Cartridge reaches to the bottom of the bottle.
<Note> Insert the tube to the bottom of the bottle.
0192Y
7. [ Close Air-in Cap ] is indicated. Confirm that the Air-in Cap is capped (closed) and press OK Button. The
pump starts turning to load the Maintenance Solution.
0193Y
8. After 30 seconds, when the peep sounds ring, the message [ Open Air-in Cap ] is indicated on the
Control Panel. Uncap (open) the air-in cap and press OK button. The air goes into the tube and washes
away the remained White Ink. It takes about 10 minutes to wash one tube.
0194Y
9. After washing with air bubbles, when the peep sounds ring, the message [ Insert Filter Cartridge ] is
indicated on the Control Panel. Remove the Maintenance Cartridge of the W1 position and insert the
Filter Cartridge and press the OK button. The air from the Filter Cartridge flushes the bubbles inside the
Tube.
10. With the peep sounds, the message [ Insert Maintenance Cartridge ] is indicated on the Control Panel.
Remove the Filter Cartridge of the W1 and insert the Maintenance Cartridge again and press the OK
button. Make sure that the tube from the Maintenance Cartridge can reach the bottom of the bottle with
Maintenance Solution.
GT-3 Series 103

pump starts turning to load the Maintenance Solution again.
0193Y
12. After refilling the Maintenance Solution, the message to go to W2 is indicated on the Display. Remove
the Maintenance Cartridge from W1 slot and mount the Maintenance Cartridge to W2 slot, and install the
well-shaken White Ink Cartridge to W1. Tube Cleaning W1 is finished successfully. Repeat the steps for
other White Print Head(s).
<Note>
Insert White Capping Cartridges (option) in place of White Ink Cartridge when you leave the GT-3 printer
unused for more than two weeks. See "7-2. Required Maintenance for the Long Storage" and "2-1-4.
Consumable Requirements and Options" for Part Code.
Loading White Ink after Tube Cleaning

1. Load the White Ink with full of Maintenance Solution in the Tube, the step 11 in the above. Insert the
White Ink Cartridge and select [ Maintenance ] > [ Load White ] from the menu and press OK.
2. Select [ All Whites ] or one from W1-W4 and press OK. White Ink starts loading.
<Note>
The menu [ Initial Cleaning ] of the White Ink starts from loading Maintenance Solution, to load White Ink
into the Tube smoothly. After Tube Cleaning, when the Tubes are filled with Maintenance Solution, select
[ Load White ] to load White Ink.
One-by-one Tube Cleaning
1. Fill the bottle with Maintenance Solution. Confirm that at least more than 250 ml per one Print Head is in
the bottle.
5. Select [ White-1 (or White-2 to White-4) ] then the message [ Set Maintenance Cartridge ] is indicated.
Remove the White Ink Cartridge of W1 and insert the Maintenance Cartridge to W1 slot and press OK
Button. Confirm that the tube of the Maintenance Cartridge reaches to the bottom of the bottle.
<Note> White Ink is retrieved only when [ All Whites ] is selected.
6. Follow the step 7 – 11 in “All Whites Tube Cleaning” in the previous pages; clean the W1 and fill it with
7. After refilling the Maintenance Solution, the message of selecting Print Head menu is indicated. Remove
the Maintenance Cartridge from W1 slot and insert well-shaken White Ink Cartridge. Tube Cleaning W1
is finished successfully. Repeat the steps 5 and 7 (this step) to clean other Tubes.
104 GT-3 Series

B. Color Tube Cleaning
Follow the process to execute Color Tube Cleaning.
<Note> Color Maintenance Cartridge (option) is necessary to clean the Tubes with Maintenance Solution.
1. Make sure your printer is in either [ Standby ] or [ Ready ] mode.

2. Prepare Color Filter Cartridge*, Color Maintenance Cartridge (option*) and Maintenance Solution*.
Confirm the room of the Waste Ink Tank (200 ml or more).
Fill the bottle with Maintenance Solution. Confirm that at least more than 250 ml per one Print Head is in
the bottle.
(* See "2-1-4. Consumable Requirements and Options" for part code.)
3. Remove the Ink Cartridge whose Print Head will be replaced and insert Color Filter Cartridge. Select
[ Maintenance ] and [ Color Tube Cleaning ], select the Print Head to be replaced and press the OK
Button. The ink will be flushed.
4. Clean the Tube and the Print Head with the Maintenance Solution. Remove the Color Filter Cartridge and
insert Color Maintenance Cartridge. Fill the Bottle with the Maintenance Solution of 250 ml or more and
insert the Tube to the bottom of the Bottle.
0082Y
5. Select [ Maintenance ] > [ Color Tube Cleaning ] from the menu and select the Print Head to be replaced
and press the OK Button. Color Tube Cleaning then starts.
<Note>
When you load the Color Ink again, replace the Color Maintenance Cartridge to the Color Filter Cartridge,
select [ Maintenance ] > [ Color Tube Cleaning ] to remove the Maintenance Solution from the Tube. Then
load the Color ink by referring to “2-6-2. Installing Ink”.
GT-3 Series 105

5. Regular Maintenance
This chapter describes how to execute GT-3 maintenance.
DANGER
Wait at least 5 minutes after turning off the power switch and disconnecting the power cord from the
wall outlet before opening the right side cover. Do not touch the high-voltage area in the control box
as high voltage can result in severe injury.
WARNING
Do not handle the power cord with wet hands, otherwise it may cause electric shocks.
CAUTION
Setting up and moving of the printer should only be carried out by a qualified technician.
Ask your Brother dealer or a qualified electrician to carry out any maintenance and inspection of the
electrical system.
Turn off the power switch and disconnect the power cord before carrying out the following
operations. If the print button is pressed by mistake, the printer might start operating and injury could
result.
 Inspection, adjustment or maintenance
 Replacing parts such as print heads or wiper blade
to your fingers.
If the power switch needs to be left on when carrying out some adjustment, be extremely careful to
observe all safety precautions.
it may be injured.
Do not move the Platen by hand. The Printer may be mechanically and electrically damaged.
106 GT-3 Series

CAUTION
Take care not to let the liquids: Ink, Wash Liquid, Maintenance Solution, Pretreatment or waste liquid
come into contact with your eyes or onto your skin, otherwise inflammation can result. In case of
contact with eyes, do not rub but immediately rinse the eyes with water.
Furthermore, do not drink the liquids: Ink, Wash Liquid, Maintenance Solution, Pretreatment or waste
liquid under any circumstances, as they can cause vomiting and diarrhea.
Be sure to wear protective goggles and gloves when handling the grease, so that they do not get
into your eyes or onto your skin. If the grease gets into your eyes or onto your skin, inflammation
can result.
Furthermore, do not drink or eat the grease. They may cause diarrhea or vomiting.
Keep the grease out of the reach of children.
GT-3 Series 107

5-1. Cleaning
5-1-1. Cleaning the Print Head Caps and Wiper Blades
Clean the Caps and Wipers when the printer indicates the warning “Exchange Maintenance Parts” on the
Display. You need Maintenance Cleaning Kit to clean the Caps and Wipers for both CMYK and White sides.
Let your customers know the importance of the maintenance to keep the printer in good conditions.
Be sure to exchange Wiper Cleaners after you clean the Caps and Wipers, which is packed together in
Maintenance Cleaning Kit.
1. Remove the Wiper Cleaner. (Refer to “6-1-17. Wiper Cleaner”.)

2. Prepare the Maintenance Cleaning Kit (Option*). (* See "2-1-4. Consumable Requirements and Options"
to get the Code Number.)
0062Y
3. Wear the gloves, and wet both sides of a Clean Stick (green grip) with the Wash Liquid.
<Note>
Use only the Wash Liquid included to wet the Clean Stick; using other liquid will cause damage to the
Print Heads.
4. Use the one side of wet Clean Stick to clean the front side of the Wiper Blade.
108 GT-3 Series

5. Use the other side of the wet Clean Stick to clean the rear of the Wiper Blade. Do not wipe the White /
Color with the same Clean Stick.
0063Y
0064Y
6. Wet other two Clean Sticks and use them to remove ink or dust from the Print Head Caps.
Use one side of the Clean Stick to clean one Print Head Cap.
<Note>
Do not use dry Clean Stick; it cannot clean ink or dust. It may damage the Print Head Caps. Wipe off the
dirty ink of Clean Sticks with soft cloth if it is too dirty and wet with Wash Liquid.
0065Y
<Note>
 The Warning “Exchange Maintenance Parts” is indicated by counting the number of Head Cleaning.
 Nozzle may be dried by being left uncapped. Execute Normal Head Cleaning for all Print Heads and
confirm the print quality with printing Nozzle Check Pattern after cleaning. (Refer to “2-6-3. Test
Print”.)
GT-3 Series 109

5-1-2. Cleaning the Print Head Nozzles

Use the Nozzle Cleaning Kit to clean the Head Nozzles (in the red square in the photo below).
<Note>
Pay careful attention in cleaning the clean Print Head Nozzles, which are both delicate and expensive. The
Print Head Nozzle should be cleaned only when it is needed by following the flows in “4-1. Checking the
Cause of Misfiring”.
Clean this area (nozzles on the nozzle plate)
1. Make sure your printer is in either [ Standby ] or [ Ready ] mode.

2. Select [ Maintenance ] from the menu and press the OK Button.
3. Select [ Nozzle Cleaning ] with the Up/Down Button from the menu and press the OK Button. The Platen
will be loaded and the Carriage and the Wipers will be moved to the cleaning position. The following
message appears.
08e0033Y
4. Turn off your printer.
Open the Nozzle cleaning Kit. Put on the gloves and wet a Clean Applicator (white grip with round form)
with full of Wash Liquid.
<Note>
 Nozzle Cleaning Kit is available for CMYK / White inks.
 Use Clean Applicators in Nozzle Cleaning Kit (white grip with round form), not in Maintenance
Cleaning Kit (green grip with flat form).
 Wet a Clean Applicator only with Wash Liquid; do not rub the Print Head with other liquid (e.g. water).
Print Head may be seriously damaged.
Fully wet with Wash Liquid
110 GT-3 Series

6.. Wet the surface (nozzle plate) of the Print Head with Wash Liquid. Then rub softly the nozzle plate to
remove ink and debris (clogged ink) from the nozzle plate until the nozzle plate is clean. Use a soft, clean
and lint-free cloth to loosen and remove the dirty ink and debris from the Clean Applicator to keep its
surface clean and wet again with Wash Liquid. Use one Clean Applicator for each color.
<Note>
The W3 and W4 Nozzles Plates of GT-381 are hard to be seen from the stop position. Move the Carriage
to the left by your hand to the position where you can clean the Nozzles easily.
W3 and W4
<Note>
Pay attention not to touch or stain the Clearance Sensor in cleaning.
(2)
Clearance Sensor
7. Check and clean around the Caps and Wipers. You can use both Clean Applicator (round form with white
grip) and Clean Stick (flag form with green grip). (See "5-1-1. Cleaning the Print Head Caps and Wiper
Blades”). Wipe off the edges of the Flushing Plate, the front/back of the Clearance Sensor and around
the Platen with a soft wet cloth with water.
9. Turn ON the printer, and initialization will start and the Carriage will move to the original position (on the
Maintenance Unit).
10. Execute Powerful Cleaning of all the Print Heads to remove the air bubbles in the nozzles. Print Nozzle
Check Pattern to confirm the print quality. (See "2-6-3. Test Print"). Execute Head Cleaning if necessary.
GT-3 Series 111

5-1-3. White Ink Maintenance

Do not leave the White ink inside the printer. White pigment precipitates and may cause serious damage to
your printer. This section describes how to maintain the White Ink. Execute the following menu to keep your
printer and print result in good conditions.
Menu Timing Details

Before
Daily Cleaning White printing Replaces the white-less White Ink caused by settled pigments.
(once a day)
White Tube Cleaning Once a week Prevents the Tubes from choking with pigments.
<Note>
Confirm if there is enough room in Waste Ink Tank before executing the maintenance.
[1] Daily Cleaning White for replacing dull White Ink (Once a day, before printing)
1. Shake the White Ink Cartridge one by one to keep the whiteness of the White Ink. Pull out one of the
White Ink Cartridge, hold the cartridge with both hands, upside down from the mounted position, and
shake by moving back and forth to mix up the pigment in the bottom and shake it horizontally, in 30
seconds to 1 minute.
2. Select [Daily Cleaning White] from the menu and press the OK Button. Select "All White" to do in one
time or select the each Print Head to do one by one. Press OK button to continue.
3. After replacing the White Ink, print Nozzle Check Pattern from [Test Print] menu to check the print quality.
Also print Whiteness pattern on the pretreated material so that you can see the whiteness.
[2] White Tube Cleaning (once a week)

This menu washes away the pigments inside the Tubes and Print Heads. When you execute this menu
all-in-one time, GT-381 for four Tubes, GT-361 for two Tubes, you can retrieve the White Ink before Tube
Cleaning. It takes time but you can save the cost. If you select the Tube one by one then the White Ink will not
be retrieved. Refer to “4-1-4. Cleaning the Tubes and Print Heads (white/Color Tube Cleaning)”.
112 GT-3 Series

5-1-4. Cleaning the inside of the printer

1. Wipe off the front/back of the Clearance Sensor and around the Platen with a soft wet cloth with water.
Use Wash Liquid to remove the clogged ink.
<Note>
The dirt of the Clearance Sensor may stain the T-shirt in loading
2. Wipe off the dust on the T-shirt Tray with wet cloth.
3. Wipe off the ink mist on the surface e.g. where the Carriage Rollers move on, with a clean and soft cloth
soaked with alcohol.
4. Wipe off the ink mist on the Carriage Guide Shaft with a clean and soft cloth soaked with alcohol. Put
some specified grease (option*) on a soft cloth and apply the Carriage Guide Shaft. After cleaning, be
sure to adjust the CR Speed from the menu. See "6-1-13. Carriage Driving Parts”.
5. Apply some grease (option*) to the gear of the CR motor if the printer causes CR errors. After applying,
be sure to adjust the CR Speed from the menu.
5-1-5. Cleaning the Encoder Strip

There must be some dust and mist covering the Encoder Strip to cause reading error when some error occurs
during the printing operation. Clean the Encoder Strip with the attached tool.
1. Prepare the Encoder Cleaner and ethanol of 95% or higher purity.

2. Select [ Maintenance ] of the menu and press OK Button.
3. Select [CR Encoder Strip Cleaning ] of the menu and press OK Button. The Platen will be loaded and the
Caps move down. Follow the message and turn off the printer.
5. Move the Carriage slowly to the rightmost position by hand.
<Note>
Ink may stain the Platen and other places while moving the Carriage, the bottom surface may be wet and
dirty with ink.
6. Loosen the four Screws with a coin as shown below.
(1)
(2)
0072Y
GT-3 Series 113

7. Hold the Encoder Cover F with both hands and lift it up by pulling out to your side. Remove the Encoder
Cover F from the printer.
<Note>
Pay attention not to give damage to the Carriage Guide Shaft. Tubes, Harnesses of solenoids and
Carriage Motor. Keep the Encoder Cover F in a flat position.
8. Apply ethanol (3) to the Felt fully, app. 2 ml, of the Encoder Cleaner.
(3)
0073Y
<Note>
Use ethanol of higher purity (95% or higher one is recommended) to remove the dust smoothly and
easily without giving damage to Encoder Strip, and not to leave any chemicals on the surface.
9. Push the position [A] shown below with your finger to give space between the felts.
0074Y
10. Put the Encoder Cleaner to the Encoder Strip so that the Encoder Strip (4) should run between the felts
straightly, and the bottom part of the felt should touch the inside of the Encoder Cover. The felts catch the
Encoder Strip when you release your finger.
(4)
(5)
0075Y
114 GT-3 Series
11. Wipe the Encoder Cleaner two or three times from the leftmost position to the right. After wiping, push the
position [A] of the Encoder Cleaner to release it from the Encoder Strip.
<Note>
Keep the level of the Encoder Cleaner in wiping.
12. Move the Carriage slowly to the leftmost position by hand.

<Note>
dirty with ink.
13. Wipe the Encoder Cleaner two or three times from the rightmost position to the left, by following the
former steps 9 and 10, where the Encoder Cleaner did not reach.
14. After wiping, push the position [A] of the Encoder Cleaner to release it from the Encoder Strip.
15. Again, move the Carriage to the rightmost position by hand.
<Note>
dirty with ink.
16. Hold the Encoder Cover F with both hands, avoid the Tubes and insert it to the notch holes on the printer,
align the screw positions to the U flutes on the Encoder Cover F (four positions) and slide it to the back
end horizontally. Make sure that the projection on the printer should fit the holes on the Encoder Cover F.
17. Tighten the four Screws.
<Note>
Confirm the Encoder Cover F should lock properly by pulling slightly to your side
18. Push the Stop Lever to release the lock when you close the Front Cover with both hands. Watch your
fingers not caught in the Front Cover. Turn ON the printer. The cleaning is success when the initialization
of the printer is done with no errors indicated.
GT-3 Series 115

6. Replacing Parts
6. Replacing Parts
This chapter describes how to dismount, replace and adjust the parts.
DANGER
Wait at least 5 minutes after turning off the power switch and disconnecting the power cord from the
wall outlet before opening the cover of the control unit. Do not touch as high voltage can result in
severe injury.
CAUTION
Ask your Brother dealer or a qualified electrician to carry out any maintenance and inspection of the
electrical system.
Turn off the power switch and disconnect the power cord before carrying out the following
operations. If the print button is pressed by mistake, the printer might start operating and injury could
result. .
 Inspection, adjustment and maintenance
 Replacing parts such as print heads or wiper blade
Wait at least 1 minute after turning off the power switch before opening the front cover. Do not touch
the head heat sink as it may be HOT and may cause a burn.
to your fingers.
Take care not to let the liquids: Ink, Wash Liquid, Maintenance Solution, Pretreatment or waste liquid
come into contact with your eyes or onto your skin, otherwise inflammation can result. In case of
contact with eyes, do not rub but immediately rinse the eyes with water.
Furthermore, do not drink the liquids: Ink, Wash Liquid, Maintenance Solution, Pretreatment or waste
liquid under any circumstances, as they can cause vomiting and diarrhea.
Keep the ink, waste liquid and wash liquid out of the reach of children.
If the power switch needs to be left on when carrying out some adjustment, be extremely careful to
observe all safety precautions.
it may be injured.
When replacing parts and installing optional accessories, be sure to use only genuine Brother parts.
Brother will not be held responsible for any accidents or problems resulting from the use of
non-genuine parts.
116 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
<Screw tightening torque>

Apply the tightening torque indicated in the following table for screws not specified. Apply the tightening
torque indicated in the following table for screws not specified. Do not tighten with more than 0.5N·m torque
When you tighten the plastic parts, which may be damaged.
[Unit: N·m]
Phillips screws, Hexagon Bolt Socket,
Nominal Diameter Locking screws
Step screws, etc. Bolt Socket
M2.5 0.4 - -
M3 0.8 1 0.5
M4 1.5 2 1
M5 3 3.5 1.5
M6 4 6 2
6-1. Replacing the Printer Parts

6-1-1. Required Tools
Prepare the following tools for replacing parts.
 Phillips screwdriver: M3, M4

 Long Phillips screwdriver (20 cm or longer): M3, M4
 Stubby screwdriver (7cm or shorter): M3, M4
 Flat-blade screwdriver: 6x100
 Hex key: 2 mm, 2.5 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, 5 mm
 Wrench (spanner): 5.5mm, 7 mm, 10 mm, 13 mm, 17 mm
 Socket or Offset wrenches: 8mm
 Long nose pliers
 Tweezers
 Mente Check Gauge: SB3169
 Socket for Bearing Nut AN01: M12
Prepare the following tools in dealing with Print Heads and PCBs.
 Anti-static Wrist Band

 Small mirror (to check the nozzle surface of Print Heads)
Refer to the section beforehand and prepare the necessary measuring apparatus and jigs.
GT-3 Series 117

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling the Covers

Upper parts of the Covers
0177Y
Disassembling
<Note>
Be sure to follow the steps below for smooth operation.
1. Open the Front Cover UF (1).

2. Remove the Link Spring L (2) and Link Spring R (3).
3. Hold the Front Cover UF (1) with both hands and close it slowly.
<Note> Without Link Springs, the Front Cover UL closes quicker than the normal condition.
118 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
4. Remove the four Caps (4), the four Flat Screws (5) and the four Washers (6).
5. Remove the four screws (7) and dismount the Cover UB (8) by moving backward.
<Note> Pay attention to the Tubes not to bend in operation.
6. Remove the screw (9) and dismount the cover switch (10) by moving backward.
7. Remove the two screws (11) and dismount the Front Cover UF (1).
GT-3 Series 119

6. Replacing Parts
Assembling
<Important!>
Mount the Upper Parts after you finish assembling the Bottom Parts; refer to the next session.
1. Put the Front Cover UF (1) on the printer (Bottom Parts must be assembled) and fix it the two screws (11).
Mount the Link Support Plate (12) vertically by pushing up and align it with the Frame.
2. Insert the Cover Switch (10) until it snaps and the switch is ON, and then fix it with the screw (9).
Insert until you

feel “click” Lift it up
Align the Frame surface and set it vertically 0180Y
3. Put the Cover UB (8) on the printer (Bottom Part must be assembled) and fix it with the four screws (7).
4. Fix it with the four Flat Screws (5), the four Washers (6) and cover them with the four Caps (4).
5. Open the Front Cover UF (1) slowly with your both hands.
<Note> Without Link Springs, you feel the Front Cover UL heavier than the normal condition.
6. Mount the Link Spring L (2) and Link Spring R (3).
0181Y
7. Close the Front Cover UF (1).
120 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
Bottom Parts of the Covers
0182Y
0183Y
GT-3 Series 121

6. Replacing Parts
Dissembling
1. Remove the three screws (13) and the nine Truss screws (14), and then dismount the Cover PF (15) and
the Cover DL (16) together by moving forward.
2. Remove the five screws (17) and one Truss screw (18), and then dismount the Cover DR (19) by moving
rightward.
3. Remove the two screws (20) and three Truss screws (21), and then dismount the Cover Cartridge (22)
by moving leftward.
4. Remove the Truss screw (23) and dismount the Cover PB (24) by pulling out upward.
5. Remove the eight screws (25) and dismount the Cover DB (26).
Assembling
1. Insert the Cover PF (15) and the Cover DL (16) together from the front side, and then fix them with the
three screws (13) and nine Truss screws (14).
2. Insert the Cover DR (19) from the right, hook it on the Frame (A) and them fix it with the five screws (17)
and the Truss screw (18).
Hook it
0184Y
3. Mount the Cover Cartridge (22) on the printer and fix it with the two screws (20) and the three Truss
screws (21).
4. Hook the Cover DB (26) on the Frame (B) and then fix it with the eight screws (25).
Pass the Waste Ink Tube through the groove (C) of the Cover DB (26).
Hook it
0185Y
5. Hook the holes on the Cover PB (24) on the claws of the printer and fix it with the Truss screw (23).
122 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-3. Assembling / Disassembling of the Platen

The following steps show to remove the Covers around the Platen.
Disassembling
1. Remove the Cover DR, Cover DL, Cover PF, Cover PB and Cover DB.
(Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling of the Covers”.)
2. Disconnect the Connector [CN4] (1) between the Main PCB and the Platen Motor.
(1)
3. Move the Platen (3) to your side, unscrew the Clamp Lever (2) and remove the Platen (3)
(3)
(2)
4. Remove the Screw Bind M4x6 (4), the Height Adjustment Lever (5), six Screws (6) and remove the
T-shirt Tray (7).
(6) (4)
(5)
(6) (7)
GT-3 Series 123

6. Replacing Parts
5. Move backward the Platen and unscrew the four Screws (8) to remove the Tray Support Plate R (9) and
the Tray Support Plate L (10).
(8) (10)
(9)
6. Unscrew the four Screws (11) and remove the Bellows Guide Plate R (12) and the Bellows Guide Plate L
(13).
(13) (12)
(13)
(12)
(11) (11)
7. Unscrew the four Screws (14) and remove the Bellows (15) and two Bellows Setting Plates (16).
(16)
(14)
(14)
(15)
(16)
124 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
Assembling
1. Hold the Bellows (3) with Bellows Guide Plate R (1) and Bellows Guide Plate L (2).
(1)
(3)
(2)
2. Assemble Bellows Guide Plate R (1) and Bellows Guide Plate L (2) by the following steps.
Keep those three parts as shown in the step 1 and put the Bellows Guide Plate R (1) through the Bellows
Support Plate (4) and set it to the position, from the back side first then the front side.
(4)
Put them through (4)

(1)
(2) (3)
(2) (1)
Setting Position
(1)
Setting Position
The back side The front side
GT-3 Series 125

6. Replacing Parts
3. Put the Bellows Guide Plate L (2) on the installing position.

<Note> Keep the Bellows (3) in the proper position supported by the Bellow Guide Plates.
Setting Position
(3)
(2)
Setting Position
4. Tighten the Bellows Guide Plate R (1) and the Bellows Guide Plate L (2) with the four Screws (5).
<Note> Tighten temporarily the backward screws first as the reference of positioning.
(2) (1)
(2)
(1)
(5) (5)
5. Hold the Bellows (3) with the two Bellows Setting Plates (6) and tighten them with four Screws (8).
(6)
(8)
(8)
(3)
(6)
126 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6. Tighten the Tray Support Plate R (9) and the Tray Support Plate L (10) with the four Screws (11).
<Note> Pull down the back edge by hand and screw so that the front edge will lift up slightly.
(9)
(10) (11)
7. Connect the Connector [CN4] (12) from the Platen Motor to the Main PCB. Mount the T-shirt Tray, Platen,
Height Adjustment Lever, Clamp Lever, Cover DR, Cover DL, Cover PF, Cover PB and Cover DB.
<Note> Make sure that the Connector is firmly connected before you put covers.
(12)
Adjustment of Platen Stopping Mechanism

The space (13) should be within 32.8±0.5mm.
32.8±0.5
(13)
GT-3 Series 127

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-4. Platen Belt and Reduction Belt

Replacing the Platen Belt
Disassembling
1. Loosen the two Bolts Socket (S/P Washer) M4x14 (1).
(1)
2. Loosen the Nut 2 M4 (2) and loosen the Bolt Socket (3) for adjusting the tension.
(2)
(3)
3. Remove two Bolt Sockets (4) and remove the Bellows Support Plate (5).
(4)
(5)
128 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
4. Remove the two Bolt Sockets (6) and disconnect the Belt Setting Plate (7) from the Platen Arm (8).
(8) (8)
(6) (7)
5. Remove the four Bolt Sockets (9) and remove the Belt Holder (10).
(9)
(10)
6. Remove the Platen Belt.
<Note> Go to the page “Replacing the Reduction Belt” and follow “Disassembling” when you replace the
Reduction Belt at the same time.
GT-3 Series 129

6. Replacing Parts
Assembling
1. Prepare the new Platen Belt.
2. Pass the Platen Belt through the Belt Setting Plate (1) and the Belt Holder (2). Hold the three tips of the
both edges of the Platen Belt (4).
(4)
(1)
(3)
(2)
3. Fix the Belt Setting Plate (1) to the Platen Arm (6) with the two Bolt Sockets (5).
(6)
(5)
<Note> Fix the Belt Setting Plate by pushing the machined surface of the Platen Arm.
(6)
(1)
4. Adjust the tension of the Belt.

(Refer to “6-1-5. Adjusting the tension of Platen Belt and Reduction Belt”.)
130 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
Replacing the Reduction Belt

Disassembling
1. Loosen the four Bolt Sockets (1).
(1)
2. Loosen the Nut 2 M4 (2) and loosen the Bolt Socket (3) for adjusting the tension.
(3)
(2)
3. Remove the two Ball Bearings Radial 688ZZ and the two Retaining Rings E6.
Prepare the new Retaining Rings, no reuse.
(4)
(5)
GT-3 Series 131

6. Replacing Parts
4. Shift the R Pulley ASSY (5) along with the groove (4).
(6)
(5) (6)
(5)
(4)
(4)
5. Remove the Reduction Belt (6) from the R Pulley ASSY (5).
Assembling
1. Hook the Reduction Belt (6) on the R Pulley ASSY (5) and put it through the groove (4).
(6) (6)
(5)
(5)
(4)
(4)
2. Assemble the two Ball Bearings Radial 688ZZ and the two new Retaining Rings E6.
Prepare the new Retaining Rings, no reuse.
3. Hook the Reduction Belt on the Motor Pulley. Adjust the tension of the Reduction Belt.
(Refer to “6-1-5. Adjusting the tension of Platen Belt and Reduction Belt”.)
132 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-5. Adjusting the tension of Platen Belt and Reduction Belt

Prepare the Sonic belt tension meter (Unitta # U-507).
Belt tension meter Weight Width Span Tension

Reference Value g/mm (W) x m (L) mm mm N
Platen Belt 752
2.5 9 40 - 50
Reduction Belt 188
<Note>
Make sure that the Connector between the Platen Motor and the Main PCB should be disconnected. (Refer to
“6-1-3. Assembling / Disassembling of the Platen”.)
Platen Belt
1. Loosen two Bolt Sockets (1).
(1)
2. Loosen the Nut 2 M4 (2) and adjust the Bolt Socket (3) by checking the tension with the belt tension
meter.
<Note> Move the Platen Arm at the rearmost position and check the tension at the left side of the Belt, by
flipping it with your finger.
・The tension increases by turning the Bolt Socket clockwise.
・The tension decreases by turning the Bolt Socket counter-clockwise.
Flipping point
(1)
(2)
(3)
3. Screw the Nut 2 M4 (2) and the two Bolt Sockets (1), load and unload the Platen by hand to make it move
smooth, and then check the tension again.
<Note> Repeat the steps 1 to 3 if the tension is out of the reference value.
4. Connect the connector from the Platen Motor to the Main PCB.
GT-3 Series 133

6. Replacing Parts
Reduction Belt
1. Loosen the four Bolt Sockets (1).
(1)
2. Loosen the Nut 2 M4 (2) and adjust the Bolt Socket (3) by checking the tension with the belt tension
meter.
<Note> Move the Platen Arm at the rearmost position and check the tension at the left side of the Belt, by
flipping it with your finger.
・The tension increases by turning the Bolt Socket clockwise.
・The tension decreases by turning the Bolt Socket counter-clockwise.
(3)
(2)
Flipping point
3. Screw the Nut 2 M4 (2) and the two Bolt Sockets (1), load and unload the Platen by hand to make it move
smooth, and then check the tension again.
<Note> Repeat the steps 1 to 3 if the tension is out of the reference value.
4. Connect the connector from the Platen Motor to the Main PCB.
134 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-6. Platen Motor

Disassemble
1. Remove the one Screw, one Cord Holder 6N (2), and remove the one Screw and the Cord Holder 5N (3).
2
3
2. Disconnect the Harness (4) and remove it from the clamps below. Disconnect the Platen Motor
Connector (CN4).
Clamps
Clamp
(4)
Connector for Platen Motor (CN4)
3. Remove the Nut 2 M4 (5) and the Bolt Socket (6) for adjusting the tension of the Belt.
(6)
(5)
GT-3 Series 135

6. Replacing Parts
4. Remove the four Bolt Sockets (7).
(6) (10)
(9)
(7)
(8)
5. Shift the Reduction Belt (8) from the Pulley.

6. Remove the Platen Pulse Motor (9) together with the Motor Bracket (10).
7. Remove the one Screw (11) and Cord Holder 5N (3)
(9)
(3)
(10)
(11)
8. Remove the four Bolt Sockets (12).
(12)
136 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
Assembling
1. Assemble the new Platen Pulse Motor (1) to the Motor Bracket (2) with the four Bolt Sockets (3).
<Note> The aspect of the Harness outlet (4) should be as shown below.
(4)
(3)
(2) (1)
2. Assemble the Cord Holder 5N (5) with the one Screw (6).
<Note>
- The aspect of the Cord Holder 5N should beat the angle of 45 degrees (see the left photo).
- The covering of the Harness should go to the Motor side by 10 mm (see the right photo).
10 mm
45°
(5)
Covering goes to the
(6) Motor by 10 mm.
3. Assemble the Motor Bracket (2) to the Motor Connecting Plate (bottom) with the four Bolt Sockets (7).
(2)
(1)
(7)
GT-3 Series 137

6. Replacing Parts
4. Pass the Harness with clamps and fix it with one Screw, Cord Holder 6N (2), one Screw and one Cord
Holder N5 (3).
2
3
<Note> Pull slightly to the right side and pass the Harness so that it will not go loose on the way.
Do not hang it down.
Do not go loose to the left.
5. Assemble the Reduction Belt and adjust the Tension.（See “6-1-5. Adjusting the tension of Platen Belt
and Reduction Belt”.）
6. Fix the Harness (8) with clamps shown below, and connect the Platen Motor Connector to the Main PCB
[CN4].
Clamp Clamps
(8)
Connector (CN4)
138 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-7. Platen Pulley Ball Bearing

Disassembling
Front side
1. Remove the Platen Belt to make the Reduction Belt (1) free. (Refer to “6-1-4. Platen Belt and Reduction
Belt”.)
2. Remove the two Ball Bearing Radial 688ZZs (2) and the two Retaining Rings (3).
<Note> Prepare new Retaining Rings (3) for replacement, you cannot reuse.
(2)
(3)
(1)
Back side
3. Remove the Platen Belt. (Refer to “6-1-4. Platen Belt and Reduction Belt”.)
4. Remove the two Bolt Sockets (4).
(4)
(5)
5. Remove the Pulley Base (5).
(7) (6)
(5)
6. Remove the two Ball Bearing Radial 688ZZs (6) and the two Retaining Rings (7).
<Note> Prepare new Retaining Rings (7) for replacement, you cannot reuse.
GT-3 Series 139

6. Replacing Parts
Assembling
Front side
1. Mount the two Ball Bearing Radial 688ZZs (1) and the two Retaining Rings (2).
<Note> Prepare new Retaining Rings for replacement, you cannot reuse.
(1)
(2)
(2)
(1)
2. Confirm that the F Pulley Assy (3) can rotate smoothly.
(3)
140 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
Back side
3. Mount the two Ball Bearing Radial 688ZZs (4) and the two Retaining Rings (5).
<Note> Prepare new Retaining Rings for replacement, you cannot reuse.
(5) (4)
(7)
4. Confirm that the R Pulley Assy (6) can rotate smoothly.
(7) (6)
5. Mount the Pulley Base (7) and the Platen Belt, and adjust the Belt Tension. (Refer to ”6-1-5. Adjusting
the tension of Platen Belt and Reduction Belt”.)
GT-3 Series 141

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-8. Platen Origin Sensor

Disassembling
1. Remove the Screw (1) and remove the Sensor Holder (2).
(2)
(1)
2. Disconnect the Harness: Platen Origin (3) from the connector (4).
(3)
(4)
3. Remove the Origin Sensor (6) from the Sensor Holder (7) by pushing the claws (5).
(5)
(6)
(7)
142 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
Assembling
1. Mount the Origin Sensor to the Sensor Holder.
<Note> First hook the claw (1) and then hook the two claws (2).
(1)
(2)
2. Connect the Harness: Platen Origin (3) to the Connector (4).
(3)
(4)
3. Fix the Sensor Holder (5) with the one Screw (6).
<Note> Mount the Sensor Holder with fitting the two projecting points of the Sensor Holder (B) with the
two positioning holes (A) on the Guide Support Plate R.
(5)
(A)
(6)
(B)
GT-3 Series 143

6. Replacing Parts
4. Turn ON the Printer.

5. Push the Platen Button on the Operation Panel to confirm that the Platen should stop at the front-most
position in unloading and stop at the back-most position in loading.
6. Confirm the top/bottom of the print position on the Platen by printing the Grid data. (Refer to “6-1-9.
Adjustment of the Platen Sensor Dog”.)
7. Mount the Cover PF and the Cover DL. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling of the Covers”.)
6-1-9. Adjustment of the Platen Sensor Dog

Adjust the print position with the Platen Sensor Dog.
Confirmation the vertical margins
1. Cover the Platen with paper, e.g. four sheets of A4 Paper as shown below.
The edges should be aligned with the Platen.
(1)
Print the Grid14x16.ar3 data in the [ Useful tools ] of [Brother GT-3 Tools ] in your PC. (Refer to the
“3-3-7. Opening the Useful Tools” in the Instruction Manual”.)
144 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
2. Confirm the margins of the top/bottom and adjust the Platen Sensor Dog if the difference of the
top/bottom margins is more than 3 mm.
6
9
5 8
5 - 9 = -4mm NG: Adjustment required 8 – 6 = 2mm OK
Adjustment
1. Remove the Cover PF and Cover DL. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling of the Covers”.)
2. Loosen the one Bolt Socket (1).
(1)
(2)
3. Adjust the Platen Sensor Dog (2) as follows and fix it with the one Bolt Socket (1).
<Note>
Fix the Platen Sensor Dog by pushing it to the machining surface (arrow direction) of the Platen Arm (3).
The standard top/bottom positions of the Platen Sensor Dog should be described in Fig A. Adjust it within
the ±2 mm or less.
(2) A
(3)
Adjust 0 ± 2 mm
GT-3 Series 145

6. Replacing Parts
<Reference>
If the actual print position is top margin = 5 mm and the bottom margin = 9 mm, then move the Platen
Sensor Dog to the backward by 2 mm then the both margins will be 7 mm, increasing the top margin by 2
mm and decreasing the bottom margin by 2 mm.
9 7
Move the Platen

Sensor Dog backward
by 2mm
5 7
4. Adjust the top/bottom margins almost equal, the differences within 3 mm, by repeating the step (2) to (5)
in the above.
5. Mount the Cover PF and Cover DL. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling of the Covers”.）
146 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-10. Platen Top Plate and Shoulder Bar

Disassembling
1. Loosen or remove the Clamp Lever (1) and remove the Platen (2).
(2)
(1)
2. Peel off the Platen Sheet as well as the adhesive tape from the Platen surface.
<Note> Prepare a new Platen Sheet for replacement, you cannot reuse.
3.
0077Ｙ
4. Remove the four Screws (3) and remove the Shoulder Bar (4).
(3)
(3)
(4)
GT-3 Series 147

6. Replacing Parts
5. Remove the one a (S/P Washer) M4X8 in the center (5) and the four Screws (6) at the corners, and then
remove the Platen Top Plate (7).
6
(6) 5
(5)
7
(7)
6. Mount the new Platen Top Plate (7) on the Platen Shaft (8).
<Note> Insert the Platen Shaft to the hole on the Platen Top Plate.
7. Fix the Platen Top Plate (7) with the one Screw (5) in the center and the four Screws (6) at the corners.
(6) (5)
(7)
148 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
8. Fix the Shoulder Bar with the four Screws (3).
(3)
(3)
(4)
9. Clean the surface of the Platen with a soft cloth damped with mild detergent and then wipe it off with a
soft and dry cloth.
10. Mount the Platen on the printer and fix it with the Clamp Lever.
11. Apply a new Platen Sheet on a completely dry surface of the Platen. Peel off the smaller part of the
coated paper. Position the Platen Sheet and apply it from the back position of the Platen, and go on little
by little by peeling off the bigger part of the coated paper.
<Note>
Put the Platen Sheet straight against the Platen without making creases.
0078Ｙ
12. Confirm the level of the Platen Top Plate. (Refer to “6-1-11. Leveling of the Platen Top Plate”.)
GT-3 Series 149

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-11. Leveling of the Platen Top Plate

Using the Block Gauge the level of the four (B)s should be 0.5 or less with the center (A) as the standard.
Required Tools
・Block Gauge
・Flathead screwdriver
(A)
(B)

2. Go to the Advanced Menu.
3. Select [ Output Check ] > [ Cap Test ] > [ Cap Down ] and press OK Button.
The Caps on the Maintenance Unit move down. Turn OFF the printer.
4. Lift up the Cover UB until it is locked by the Stopper.
5. Adjust the height at the position of the Platen by loosing the two Set Screw Sockets (FT) M6X6 (1) and
the Nut 2 M4, and adjusting the height of the Bolt M4X12 (3).
<Note> Confirm the height from the bottom of the Head Holder Assy (C) to the surface of the Platen Top Plate
(D) should be 9.8 ± 0.2 mm when the Height Adjustment Lever (4) is at the A position.
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(C)
(D)
10 mm
9.6 mm 9.8 ± 0.2
150 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
Adjustment of the Level by four Height Adjustment Screws

1. Loosen the Screw (1).
(1)
2. Loosen the Nut M8 P1 (3) with fitting the MINUS driver (4) in the groove of the Height Adjustment Screw
(2).
(3)
(3)
(2) (4)
3. Adjust the height of the Height Adjustment Screw (2) by screwing the MINUS driver.
Clockwise: the height of the Platen goes up.
Counterclockwise: the height of the Platen goes down.
<Note> Rotate the Height Adjustment Screw by 1/4 or even 1/8 so that you can understand how much
you have adjusted.
(3)
(2)
4. Fix the Nut M8 P1 (3) with the MINUS driver set in the groove of the Height Adjustment Screw.
GT-3 Series 151

6. Replacing Parts
5. Tighten the Screw (1).
(1)
6. Adjust the level of the Platen Top Plate by the levelness of the four (B)’s should be 0.5 mm or less, by
repeating the steps 1 to 5 with the center (A) as the standard.
(A)
(B)
152 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-12. Carriage Motor

Adjust the firmware with GT-3 Service Tool, after you replace to the new Carriage Motor. (Refer to “3-3. GT-3
Service Tool”.)
1. Remove the AC Cord and open the Cover UB.

2. Remove the Connector (1) of the Motor.
(1)
3. Remove the two screws (2) that fix the Motor, and remove the Motor Assy from the Motor Fixing Plate,
and then mount the new Motor Assy with the two screws.
Fix it with your finger
(2)
4. Confirm the backlash.

You can confirm by moving the Gear of the Pulley side with fixing the Gear of the Motor side with your
finger.
Feel some play (backlash) with the Gear of the Pulley side when you fix the Gear of the Motor side.
Confirm that there should be 0.01mm – 0.1mm backlash all around the Gear of the Pulley side
(perimeter).
<Note>
Less or no backlash may damage the Motor Shaft and make the lifetime shorter than the normal
condition.
GT-3 Series 153

6. Replacing Parts
Firmware Adjustment with GT-3 Service Tool --- Adjust CR Speed & CR Motor Date.
2. Execute GT-3ServiceTool.exe by double-clicking.
3. Select [ Printer Parts Exchange ] and click [ Next ].
4. Select [ Carriage Motor ] and click [ Next ].
Follow the wizard and adjust the firmware.
154 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-13. Carriage Driving Parts
0186Y
Disassembling
1. Turn ON the printer, lower the Caps and turn OFF the printer. (Refer to “3-1-5-3. Output Check”.)
2. Remove the Cover Cartridge and lift up the Cover UB. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling of the
Covers”.)
3. Loosen the Bolt Socket (1) and remove the Bolt Socket (2).
<Note>
Confirm the Belt tension before you loosen the Bolt Socket (1) when you re-use the Belt after adjustment.
(See the process of adjustment in the next page.)
4. Loosen the Bolt Socket (3) and remove the Bolt Socket (4).
If you replace the Belt only, disassembling is finished here. Go to the step 4 in Assembling.
5. Disconnect the Connector (A) of the Motor.
(A)
6. Remove the Bolt Socket (5) and remove the CR Drive Unit ASSY (6).
7. Remove the Bolt Socket (1) and remove the CR Follow Unit Assy (7).
GT-3 Series 155

6. Replacing Parts
Assembling
1. Fix the CR Drive Unit Assy (6) with the Bolt Socket (5).
2. Connect the Connector of the Motor.
3. Fix temporarily the CR Follow Unit Assy CR (7) with the Bolt Socket.
4. Hook the Belt (4) to the Pulley (8) and mount it on the Belt Holder (9), and then fix the Belt Holder (9) with
the Bolt Socket (3).
Align the three tips from the edge of the Belt (4) and mount it in the groove of the Belt Holder (9).
5. Mount the Bolt Socket (2) on the CR Follow Unit Assy (7).
Adjustment
1. Rotate the Bolt Socket (2) by make the Bolt Socket (1) loose to adjust the Tension of the Belt.
The tension increases when you rotate the Bolt Socket (2) clockwise.
The tension decreases when you rotate the Bolt Socket (2) counterclockwise.
2. Tighten the Bolt Socket (1), move the Carriage right and left by hand several times for running-in, and
then confirm the Tension.
Use the UNITTA ‘s Belt Tension Gauge by the following settings:
 WEIGHT: 002.5 g/m（3GT）
 WIDTH: 009.0 mm/R
 SPAN: 878 mm
(Without Belt Tension Gauge, confirm by measuring the force when you push the center of the belt span
length by 13.7mm.)
13.7 mm
5.3 ~ 5.9 N
3. Repeat the step 1 and 2 above until the tension should be as shown below:
New Belt: tension 80-90 N (force pushing by hand: 5.3-5.9N)
Used Belt: the original tension measured before you disassembled.
156 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
Firmware Adjustment with GT-3 Service Tool after exchanging the Carriage Belt or Tension adjustment
4. Select [ Carriage Belt or tension adjustment ] and click [ Next ].
GT-3 Series 157

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-14. Encoder Strip
0187Y
Disassembling
1. Remove the Cover UF and the Cover UB. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling of the Covers”.)
2. Loosen the four screws (1) and remove the Encoder Cover F (2).
3. Remove the four Bolt Sockets (3), two Screws (4) and shift the Carriage Back Plate (6) so that you can
see the Encoder Strip (5) inside.
<Note> Take care not to bend or crush the Tubes; they are very fragile.
(6)
Shift
(5)
(4)
158 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
0188Y
4. Remove the Spring (7) and Resin Rivet (8), and then remove the Encoder Strip (5).
Push the tip of the Resin Rivet (8) and pull out the core to remove.
<Note> Take care not to give any damage to the Encoder Strip (5).
Pull out the core

芯を抜く
(5) (8)
5 8
Push
押す
GT-3 Series 159

6. Replacing Parts
Assembling
1. Pass the Encoder Strip (5) into the groove (A) of the Encoder, and mount the Resin Rivet (8) on the left
hole, and hook the Spring (7) on the right hole.
Confirm the direction: the black (covered) area should be in the left bottom.
Insert the Resin Rivet (8) to the position of the brim (B), and the push the tip (C) by holding it with pliers.
Align the Encoder Strip (5) in the front (D) of the support plate when you hook the Spring (7).
<Note>
Take care not to give any damage to the Encoder Strip (5); it is OK if the support plate gets damaged.
(A)
(5)
(C)
(B)
(8)
(Following to the next page)
160 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
(7)
(D)
2. Move back the Carriage Back Plate (6) to the original position, and mount it with the four Bolt Socket (3)
and the two Screws (4).
<Note> Take care not to bend or crush the Tubes; they are very fragile.
3. Mount the Encoder Cover F (2) with the four Screws (1).
4. Mount the Cover UB and UF. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling of the Covers”.)
Adjustment
1. Execute CR Origin Sensor Adjustment. (Refer to “3-1-5-1. CR Origin Sensor Adjustment”.)
2. If read error occurs, e.g. printing position shift, clean the Encoder Strip. (Refer to “5-1-5. Cleaning the
Encoder Strip”.)
GT-3 Series 161

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-15. Sensor Flap
0189Y
Disassembling
1. Open the Front Cover UF and remove the Cover DL and PF. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling
of the Covers”.)
2. Remove the three Screws (1) and remove the Sensor Flap (2).
Go to the Step 5 in Assembling when you replace only the Sensor Flap (2).
3. Remove the Cover DR. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling of the Covers”.)
4. Remove the Screw (3), the Bolt Socket (4) and remove the Sensor Flap Shaft (5) and the Sensor Plate
Support Plate L (6).
5. Remove the Connector (A) that connects to the Flap Sensor and the Flap Solenoid.
(A)
(A)
6. Remove the Bolt Socket (7) and remove the Sensor Plate Support Plate R (8).
162 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
Assembling
1. Mount the Sensor Plate Support Plate (8) with the Bolt Socket (7).
2. Connect the Connector that connects the Flap Sensor and the Flap Solenoid.
3. Insert the right edge of the Sensor Flap Shaft (5) into the Sensor Plate Support Plate R (8) and the
Sensor Flap Dog (9), and insert the left edge into the Sensor Plate Support Plate L (6). Fix the Sensor
Plate Support Plate L (6) with the Bolt Socket (4) and fix the Sensor Flap Dog (9) with the Screw (3).
Mount the back side of the Sensor Flap Dog (9) on the Sensor Flap Release Plate (1).
Touch the convex part of the Sensor Plate Support Plate L (6) with the Frame.
0191Y
Touch
0190Y
4. Mount the Cover DR. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling of the Covers”.)

5. Fix the Sensor Flap with the three screws.
6. Mount the Cover DL and the Cover PF (refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling of the Covers”.), and
close the Front Cover UF.
GT-3 Series 163

6. Replacing Parts
Adjustment
1. Turn ON the printer and execute the I/O Check. (Refer to “3-1-3. How to go to Advanced Menu”.)
2. Confirm the Flap on the Display; ON when you lower the Sensor Flap to the lowest bottom with your
hand, OFF when the Sensor Flap moves by approx. 0.5mm naturally when you release your hand. If the
Flap Sensor will not switch OFF/ON, then loosen the Nut (11) and rotate the Bolt Socket (12) to adjust
the switching position.
Lower the Flap to the lowest bottom
OFF
ON
It moves back naturally by 0.5 mm.
164 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-16. Assembling / Disassembling of the Maintenance Unit
<Note>
A Maintenance Unit Check Gauge is required when installing the Maintenance Unit.
Cover the Print Head Nozzles with Print Head Protection Film not to make them dry.
Required Tools
・5 mm hexagonal wrench
・Phillips screwdriver
・Maintenance Unit Check Gauge (SB3169001 MNT CHECK GAUGE)
・Four Print Head Protection Films (SA6292001, 4 NOZZLE PROTECT FILMs)
・Maintenance Solution and Wash Liquid
A. Preparation
2. Select [ Maintenance ] > [ Maintenance Parts Exchange ] from the menu and press the OK button. The
Platen moves to its storage position, the Maintenance Unit Cap mechanism drops, and the Print Head
Carriage moves to the center position and stops.
3. The message “Turn Off, Refer to instruction manual” appears. Turn OFF the printer and unplug the AC
Cord.
4. Wash the Print Head Protection Films with either Maintenance Solution or Wash Liquid to keep them
clean and safe. Cover the cleaned Print Heads with the Print Head Protection Films not to make them dry.
<Note>
・ Touch the surface horizontally with the Clean Applicator as shown in the following image to make the
Nozzles clean and wipe softly the Nozzle Plate (1) with the Clean Applicator.
・ Use one Clean Applicator for one Print Head.
・ Wipe off the dirty ink on the sponge with clean and soft cloth. Wet with Wash Liquid and wipe off.
(1)
00161Y,0052Y
GT-3 Series 165

6. Replacing Parts
B. Removing the Maintenance Unit from GT-3

1. Remove the Cover DB and the Cover PB in the back, and Cover DL and Cover PF in the front. Refer to
“6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling of the Covers”.
2. Disconnect the connector (2) from the Maintenance PCB (1).
(1)
(2)
3. Remove the Connector (2) and the Cord Clamp (3) to make the Harness free.
(3)
(2)
4. Remove the four Bolt Sockets (4) that fix the Maintenance Unit with the printer.
(4) (4)
166 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
5. Remove the Flushing Plate (5).

(5) Flushing Felt
スポンジ
Flushing Sponge
フェルト 0067Ｙ
6. Pull out the Drain Tube from the Waste Ink Tank and prevent the Tube from draining, e.g. use a clip and
some cloth to cover the edge, and pull out the Maintenance Unit from the back.
C. Temporary assembling the Maintenance Unit to the GT-3 body

1. Insert the Maintenance Unit from the back. Align the two positioning pins with the left/right sides of the
U-shaped grooves (1). It is easier to guide the position by inserting the M4 screws.
(1) (1)
2. Tighten the four Bolt Sockets temporarily to adjust the Maintenance Unit back and forth.
<Note> Pay attention that the Waste Ink Tube (2) should not be bent.
(2)
GT-3 Series 167

6. Replacing Parts
D. Adjusting the Front/Rear Position of the Maintenance Unit

Use the Maintenance Unit Check Gauge.
1. Rotate the CL Drive Cam (1) with a finger and move the Cap Rubbers (2) to the down position.
(2)
(1)
(1) Maintenance Unit
2. Set the Maintenance Unit Check Gauge (3) on the Shaft (4) and the Frame (5) under the Belt. Cross the
Check Gauge and the Shaft at right angles (perpendicularly).
(3)
(4)
(5)
168 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
3. Tighten the four Bolt Sockets (with tightening torque 6 N·m) so that the clearance of the Maintenance
Unit Check Gauge and the Cap Rubbers should be equal.
4. Remove the Maintenance Unit Check Gauge.

5. Move the Carriage to the upper position of the Maintenance Unit.
10 mm
6. Rotate the CL Cam with a finger and move the Cap Rubbers to the up position.
Additionally rotate the CL Cam to move the Cap Rubbers at the bottom position.
Move the Carriage between the Flushing Plate and the Platen, so that you can see the surface of the
Print Heads.
GT-3 Series 169

6. Replacing Parts
7. Looking at the Print Head from below, visually check that the Crushless Plate (7) and Cap Rubber are in
the correct position. Adjust the front/rear position if there is a problem.
a) The ink mark (6) of the Cap Lips should not protrude from the Crushless Plate (7).
b) The ink mark (6) of the Cap Lips should not contact the Nozzle Plate surface (8).
Nozzle Plate (8)

!
(6)
(6)
(7)
OK NG
8. Connect the Connector (10) of the Maintenance PCB (9). Mount the Cord Clamp (11).
(9)
(11)
(10)
(10)
9. Mount the Flushing Plate.

10. Mount the Covers. Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling of the Covers”.
11. Remove the Print Head Protection Films.
13. Confirm the initialization. Turn OFF the printer.
170 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-17. Wiper Cleaner

Disassembling
The Wiper Cleaner needs to be replaced regularly. Keep the Print Head Cap and Wiper Blade clean when
replacing the Wiper Cleaner. If not, the waste ink may drop on a T-shirt in printing or mis-firing may not be
easily improved.
5. Select [ Maintenance ] from the menu by pressing Up/Down Buttons and press OK Button.
6. Select [ Maintenance Parts Exchange ] and press OK Button. The Platen will be loaded and the Wipers
will be moved to the cleaning position. Follow the message and turn off the printer.
0046Y
8. Cover your right hand with a plastic bag so that you can hold the used Wiper Cleaner safe and clean.
Pick the right edge of the Wiper Cleaner and move slightly to the right (1-2 mm) by your right hand, the
claw in the right will be released.
0058Y
9. Move the Wiper Cleaner slightly to the left (1-2 mm) to release the claw in the left. Pay attention not to
tilt the Wiper Cleaner or the waste ink may drop. Keep flat and move slowly.
<Note>
Do not tilt the Wiper Cleaner, ink may get on your hands or clothing.
0059Y
GT-3 Series 171

6. Replacing Parts
10. Pick the plastic bag on your right hand with your left hand, and wrap the Wiper Cleaner with the plastic
bag.
0060Y
11. Remove the wrapped Wiper Cleaner carefully, not to drop waste ink and dispose of in accordance with
local regulations
0061Y
<Note>
Pay attention not to soil the Timing Belt and the other parts with waste ink.
Assembling
1. Mount the new Wiper Cleaner by following the reverse steps 4 to 6 in reassembling above.
<Note>
Do not give stress to the Timing Belt in mounting the Wiper Cleaner.
If your printer turns on with no errors, replacement of the Wiper Cleaner has been completed
successfully. Turn off your printer and check if the Wiper Cleaner is correctly mounted if something
irregular occurs, e.g. abnormal noise or error "No Wiper Cleaner (CMYK/White)".
0066Y
172 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-18. Checking and Adjusting the Wiper Blade Assy

The Wiper Blade cannot wipe off the waste ink if the Rubber (blade) of the Wiper Blade Assy (1) is bent or
worn out, and this will cause serious damage to the print quality. Confirm the situation and prepare the
Maintenance Cleaning Kit (options*) and the Nozzle Cleaning Kit (options*) to clean the Nozzles of the Print
Heads and the Cap Rubbers.
(1)
(2)
Required Tools
・Cap Cleaning Kit and the plastic gloves (packed together)

2. Select [ Maintenance ] from the menu by pressing Up/Down Buttons and press OK Button.
3. Select [ Maintenance Parts Exchange ] and press OK Button. The Platen will be loaded and the Wipers
will be moved to the cleaning position. Follow the message and turn OFF the printer.
Open the Front Cover with both hands until it is locked with the stopper.
0046Y
4. Cover your right hand with a plastic bag so that you can hold the used Wiper Cleaner safe and clean.
Pick the right edge of the Wiper Cleaner and move slightly to the right (1-2 mm) by your right hand, the
claw in the right will be released.
0058Y
GT-3 Series 173

6. Replacing Parts
5. Move the Wiper Cleaner slightly to the left (1-2 mm) to release the claw in the left. Pay attention not to tilt
the Wiper Cleaner or the waste ink may drop. Keep flat and move slowly.
<Note>
Do not tilt the Wiper Cleaner, ink may get on your hands or clothing.
0059Y
6. Pick the plastic bag on your right hand with your left hand, and wrap the Wiper Cleaner with the plastic
bag.
0060Y
7. Remove the wrapped Wiper Cleaner carefully, not to drop waste ink and dispose in according with local
regulations.
0061Y
<Note> Pay attention not to soil the Timing Belt and the other parts with waste ink.
174 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
8. Clean the Caps and Wipers with Maintenance Cleaning Kit if necessary.
9. Wear the plastic gloves (the ones in the Maintenance Cleaning Kit).
0063Y.0064Y.0065Y
GT-3 Series 175

6. Replacing Parts
10. Remove the projection on the right side of the Wiper Blade Assy (3) from the Wiper Drive Plate by pulling
the Wiper Drive Plate to the right by 2mm, and pull the Wiper Blade Assy out horizontally.
* Better to prepare a plate with the same width of the Wiper for supporting.
<Note> Do not stretch the Wiper Drive Plate by force, it may be damaged.
Wiper Blade Assy
Wiper Drive Plates

In the left side
(3)
11. Insert the projections (4) of the new Wiper Blade Assy to the oval holes on the left Wiper Drive Plate.
(4)
(5) (5)
176 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
12. Insert the projection of the right side of the Wiper Blade Assy (6) by sliding the inside of the Wiper Drive
Plate.
Rubber Blade side
(6)
Rubber Blade side Wiper Drive Plate in the right side
<Note> Do not stretch the Wiper Drive Plate by force, it may be damaged.
13. Make sure that the projections of both sides are inserted properly to the oval holes on the Wiper Drive
Plate.
14. Mount the Wiper Cleaner.
0066Y
15. Close the Front Cover and turn ON the printer.
<Note>
If an abnormal sound is emitted or some errors appear when you turn ON the printer, there is a possibility
that the Wiper Blade and the Wiper Cleaner may be touching. Confirm the positions and the situation that
the Wiper Cleaner is properly mounted.
GT-3 Series 177

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-19. Pump Tube
Required Tools
・Nippers
・Phillips screwdriver of 70mm long

2. Remove the Cover DB and the Cover PB in the back, and the Cover DL and the Cover PF in the front.
Suction Pump Assy
3. Remove the two Screws (1) that fix the Pump Holder.
(1)
(1)
4. Disconnect the Pump Tube (3) that is connected to the Drain Plug (2).
(3)
(2)
(2)
(3)
178 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
5. Cut the Band (4) with the nippers and remove the Pump Tube (3) from the T Plug (5).
(4)
(3)
(5)
6. Remove the two Screws (7) that fix the Pump Rotor Holder (6).
(6)
(3)
(7)
(5)
7. Remove the Pump Rotor Holder (6) by lifting the left edge to your side by 2mm.
(3)
(5)
(6)
GT-3 Series 179

6. Replacing Parts
8. Pull out the Pump Tube (3).
(3)
9. Insert the new Pump Tube (9) in the U-shaped groove.
(9)
10. Apply some grease (SB3229001GREASE EM-30L) slightly to the new Pump Tube (9), 30-140mm long
from the edge of the Band, approx 0.3 gram. Take care not to apply too much grease.
30 mm
140 mm
180 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
11. Slide the Pump Rotor Holder (6) from the left side to the right side of the Pump Housing (10) and push
down until it clicks.
(10)
(6)
12. Fix the Pump Rotor Holder (6) with the two Screws (7) with tightening torque 0.3 N·m. Do not push the
Pump Rotor Holder to the right side.
(6)
(8)
(7)
13. Insert the Pump Tube (3) to the T Plug (5). Bind it with the Band (4) not to slip the Pump Tube from the T
Plug (5).
(3)
(4)
(5)
GT-3 Series 181

6. Replacing Parts
14. Connect the Pump Tube (3) to the Drain Joint (2).
(3)
(2)
15. Pass through the Pump Tube at the side of the Frame. Pay attention that the Pump Tube should not
bend around the outlet.
16. Insert the Pump Holder to the Frame and fix it with the left/right Screws (1) with tightening torque 1.5 N·m.
(1)
(1)
17. Attach the Covers. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling of the Covers”.)

18. Adjust the firmware (Tube pump) with GT-3 Service Tool. Refer to the end of “6-1-20.Suction Pump
Assy”.
182 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-20. Suction Pump Assy

Execute the GT-3 Service Tool to adjust the parts after replacing the Tube Pump.
Required Tools
・Nippers

2. Remove the Cover DB and the Cover PB in the back, and the Cover DL and the Cover PF in the front.
Suction Pump Assy
3. Remove the Maintenance Unit. Refer to “6-1-16. Assembling / Disassembling of the Maintenance Unit”.
4. Disconnect the Connector of the Harness:MNT Motor P (1) from the Maintenance PCB (2).
(2)
(1)
GT-3 Series 183

6. Replacing Parts
5. Remove the sensor (4) from the Harness: MNT Sensor (3).
(4)
(4)
(3)
6. Cut the Band (5) with nippers and remove the Pump Tube (7) from the T Plug (6).
(5)
(6)
(7)
7. Remove the two Screws (9) that fix the Pump Holder (8).
(8)
(9)
(9)
184 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
8. Remove the Tube Joint (11) and the Maintenance Middle Tube 2 (12) from the Waste Ink Joint (10).
(12)
(10) (12)
(11)
(10)
9. Replace to the new Suction Pump Assy (13) and insert the Tube Joint (11) and the Maintenance Middle
Tube 2 (12) to the Waste Ink Joint (10).
Pass the Harness:MNT Motor P(1) through the Bushing (14).
(14)
(10) (1)
(11)
(12)
(13)
10. Insert the Pump Holder (8) to the Frame (16) and fix it with the left/right Screws (9) with tightening torque
1.5 N·m.
Pass through the Pump Tube (7) at the side of the Frame. Pay attention that the Pump Tube should not
bend around the outlet.
(8)
(8)
(9)
(16) (9)
(7)
GT-3 Series 185

6. Replacing Parts
11. Insert the Pump Tube (7) to the T Plug (6).

Tighten the Tube Pump (7) with the Band (5) at the root of the T Plug (6).
(5)
(7)
(6)
12. Insert the Sensor (4) to the Harness: MNT Sensor (3).
(4)
(4)
(3)
13. Connect the Connector of the Harness:MNT Motor P (1) from the Maintenance PCB (2).
(2)
(1)
14. Mount the Maintenance Unit. Refer to “6-1-16. Assembling / Disassembling of the Maintenance Unit”.
186 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
Firmware adjustment with GT-3 Service Tool

4. Select the [ Tubepump ] and click [ Next ].
GT-3 Series 187

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-21. Replace the Pump Sensor

Required Tool
Disassembling
2. Remove the Cover PB and DB. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling of the Covers”.)
Suction Pump Assy
3. Remove the connector (1) and remove the two Screws (2) that fix the Sensor Holder of the Suction Pump.
188 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
Replacement & Assembling

1. The Sensor (3) is to be replaced. Make sure that the claws (4) of the Sensor are properly hooked.
3 Entry of the Connector

2 3
2. Fix the Pump Sensor Holder by the two Screws (2) with tightening torque 1.5 N·m.
3. Connect the Connector (1).
Reconfirmation
2. Select [ Maintenance Unit ] in the Advanced Menu. (Refer to “3-1-3. How to go to Advanced Menu” and
“3-1-5-4. Input Check”.)
3. Confirm that the display shows ON/OFF by turning the Pump Rotor Gear.
(There is a hole in the circumferential of the Pump Rotor Gear; the sensor is ON at the hole.)
4. Turn OFF the printer after the initial operation is confirmed.
GT-3 Series 189

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-22. Cap Rubber

Required Tool
Disassembling
2. Select [ Maintenance ] > [ Nozzle Cleaning ] from the menu and press the OK button.
The Platen moves to the rear, the Caps (1) are down and then the Carriage moves between the Flushing
Plate and the Platen.
3. The message “Turn Off, Refer to instruction manual” appears. Turn OFF the printer.
4. Open the Front Cover UB.
5. Remove the Wiper Cleaner. (Refer to “6-1-18. Checking and Adjusting the Wiper Blade Assy”.)
6. Move the Wiper Blade Assys to the both edges.
(2)
(1)
(3)
Cap Lifter Frame
7. Remove the Cap Rubber (1) from the Cap Rubber Holder (3).
Pay attention not to break the claws (4) of the Cap Rubber Holder.
(1)
(4)
190 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts

1. Mount the new Cap Rubber (1) to the Cap Rubber Holder (2). Hold the both sides at the Hole of the Cap
Rubber (left photo), and make the hole slightly wider and push it to the Cap Rubber Holder.
2. Push the Cap Rubber around the hole and make it fixed. Hook the six claws (3) around the Cap Rubber
Holder.
(1)
(3)
(2)
(3)
<Note>
Confirm that the six claws (3) are properly hooked, and push the Rubber Cap from the top to make the
Cap Rubber flat and fixed.
3. Mount the Wiper Cleaner.

4. Close the Front Cover UB.
6. Turn OFF the printer after the initial operation is confirmed.
GT-3 Series 191

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-23. Cassette SW Harness Assy

Required Tool
Disassembling
1. Remove the Maintenance Unit. (Refer to “6-1-16 Assembling / Disassembling of the Maintenance Unit”)
2. Remove the Wiper Blade Assys and the Wiper Cleaners (Refer to “6-1-18. Checking and Adjusting the
Wiper Blade Assy”.）
3. Disconnect the two connections (1) of the Connector and the four Screws (2).
(2)
(1)
(1) (2)
4. Remove the two Screws (3) with holding the Cleaner Sensor Holder B (4) by hand.
(3)
(3)
(4)
(4)

1. Mount the new Cassette SW Harness Assy (1), with the hinge part of the Sensor to the top, at the boss
inserted on the groove (3) of the Cleaner Sensor Holder (2). Do the other side as the same way.
(2) (2)
(1)
(3)
192 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
2. Fix the Cleaner Sensor Holder B (4) with the Screw (5), with tightening torque 0.8 N·m.
(5)
(5)
(4)
(4)
3. Fix the four Screws of the Cord Clamp (6) and connect the Connector (8).
(6) Lift of the Harness must be

less than 13 mm
(7) (6)
(8)
(6)
(8)
(7)
4. Mount the Wiper Blade Assys and the Wiper Cleaners.

5. Mount the Maintenance Unit. (Refer to “6-1-16. Assembling / Disassembling of the Maintenance Unit”. )
6. Confirm the initial operation, which is OK with no Wiper errors occur.
GT-3 Series 193

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-24. Sensor for the CL Drive Cam

Required Tool
Disassembling
1. Remove the Maintenance Unit. (Refer to “6-1-16. Assembling / Disassembling of the Maintenance
Unit”. )
2. Remove the Screw (2) that fixes the Cap Sensor Holder.
(1)
(2)
(4)
3. Remove the Connector (3) and the Sensor (4).
(4)
(3)

1. Replace to the new Sensor (4) and connect the Connector (3).
2. Confirm that the claws (5) of the Sensor are fixed properly.
(5)
Inlet of the connector
(4)
194 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
3. Fix the Cap Sensor Holder with the Screw, with tightening torque 1.5 N·m.
4. Mount the Maintenance Unit. (Refer to “6-1-16. Assembling / Disassembling of the Maintenance Unit”. )
5. Confirm the initial operation, which is OK with no errors occur.
Hint: How to replace with the Maintenance Unit mounted on the printer
Required Tools
・Phillips screwdriver of 70mm long

2. Remove the Screw (2) that fixes the Maintenance Cover (1).
(1)
(2)
3. Remove the Screw (4) that fixes the Cap Sensor Holder (3).
(3)
(4)
4. Remove the Connector.

5. Replace to the new Sensor and connect the Connector. Make sure that the all the claws of the sensor
are properly hooked.
6. Fix the Cap Sensor Holder (3) with the Screw (4) with tightening torque 1.5 N·m.
7. Mount the Maintenance Cover (1) with the Screw (2) with tightening torque 0.5 N·m.
GT-3 Series 195

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-25. Motor of the CL Drive Cam

Required Tool
Disassembling
1. Remove the Maintenance Unit. (Refer to “6-1-16. Assembling / Disassembling of the Maintenance
Unit”. )
2. Remove the two Screws (2) that fix the Motor (1).
(1)
(2)
3. Remove the Connector (3) (see the photo below).

1. Replace to the new Motor (1) and connect the Connector (3).
(1)
(3)
2. Fix the Motor (1) with the Screw (2) (see the photo at the top) with tightening torque 0.8 N·m. Connect the
Connecter (3) with the bottom up.
(3)
(3) (4)
(4)
196 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
3. Pull out the Harness (4) of the Motor not to sag down so that the Harness may be damaged in mounting.
4. Mount the Maintenance Unit. (Refer to “6-1-16. Assembling / Disassembling of the Maintenance Unit”.)
Reconfirmation
2. Select [ Output Check ] > [ Cap Test ] in the Advanced Menu. (Refer to “3-1-3. How to go to Advanced
Menu” and “3-1-5-4. Input Check”.)
3. Confirm that the Caps should move Up/Down properly, with no errors.
4. Turn OFF the printer and turn ON again, to initialize the Carriage position to the Maintenance Unit and
turn OFF.
5. Attach the Maintenance Unit and the Covers. (Refer to “6-1-16. Assembling / Disassembling of the
Maintenance Unit”.)
GT-3 Series 197

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-26. Wiper Sensor

Required Tool
Disassembling
1. Remove the Maintenance Unit. (Refer to “6-1-16. Assembling / Disassembling of the Maintenance Unit”.)
2. Remove the Connector (1).
(2)
(4)
(1)
3. Remove the Screw (3) that fixes the W Sensor Holder (2).
(2)
(3)

1. Replace the Sensor (4).
2. Confirm that the claws (5) of the Sensor are hooked firmly.
(5)
(5)
(4)
(4)
198 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
3. Fix the W Sensor Holder with the Screw with tightening torque 0.5 N·m.
4. Connect the Connector.
Reconfirmation
1. Turn ON the printer and select [ Output Check ] > [ Wiper Test ] in the Advanced Menu. (Refer to “3-1-3.
How to go to Advanced Menu” and “3-1-5-3. Output Check”.)
2. Move the Carriage out of the Maintenance Unit by hand when the Caps are down, and confirm that the
Wiper should move [ to Center ] or [ to Both Ends ] properly.
3. Push the Stop Button to move the Carriage to the home position and turn OFF the printer.
GT-3 Series 199

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-27. Adjusting the Height of Wiper Blade

Required Tool
・ Phillips screwdriver
・ Hand mirror
・ Maintenance Unit Check Gauge (SB3169001 MNT CHECK GAUGE)
<Note>
The spare Maintenance Unit parts are shipped as temporarily adjusted in the factory.
Disassembling
2. Select [ Maintenance ] > [ Maintenance Parts Exchange ] from the menu and press the OK button. The
Platen moves to its storage position, the Maintenance Unit Cap mechanism drops, and the Print Head
Carriage moves to the center position and stops.
3. The message “Turn Off, Refer to instruction manual” appears. Turn OFF the printer and unplug the AC
Cord.
4. Remove the Cover DB. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling of the Covers”.)
5. Open the Cover UB.
6. Remove the Wiper Cleaners. (Refer to “6-1-18. Checking and Adjusting the Wiper Blade Assy”.)
7. Move the W Drive Base F Assy (1) by hand so that the Wipers (2) should to the Center, where the both
Wipers are almost touching, and then move again to the middle of the Caps where they are located as
shown in the photo below.
8. Pass the Maintenance Unit Check Gauge (3) under the Belt (4) and put its both edges on both the Shaft
(5) and the Frame as shown in the image below. Confirm that the Maintenance Unit Check Gauge should
cross the Shaft vertically.
(3)
(5)
(4)
(2)
(1)
200 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
9. Adjust the height of the Color Wiper (front side): Adjust the height of the Wiper by loosing the three
Screws ((S/P Washer) M3x8 (7) and (S/P Washer) M4x8 (8)) that fix the WL Cam Bracket R (6) and
sliding them up and down, so that the bottom of the Maintenance Unit Check Gauge (3) and the Wiper
should be within 0 ± 0.3 mm. Confirm by moving the WL Cam Bracket R parallel.
(Screw (S/P Washer) M3x8 with tightening torque 0.5 N·m, Screw (S/P Washer) M4x8 with tightening
torque 1.5 N·m)
(6)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(3)
(3)
Check the height here
10. Adjust the height of the White Wiper (back side): Adjust the height of the Wiper by loosing the three
Screws ((S/P Washer) M3x8 (10) and (S/P Washer) M4x8 (11)) that fix the WL Cam Bracket L (9) and
sliding them up and down, so that the bottom of the Maintenance Unit Check Gauge and the Wiper
should be within 0 ± 0.3 mm. Confirm by moving the WL Cam Bracket L parallel.
(Screw (S/P Washer) M3x8 with tightening torque 0.5 N·m, Screw (S/P Washer) M4x8 with tightening
torque 1.5 N·m)
(Continued to the next page)
GT-3 Series 201

6. Replacing Parts
(3)
(3)
Check the height here
11. Mount the Wiper Cleaners.

12. Mount the Cover DB. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling of the Covers”.)
14. Select the menu [ Maintenance ] > [ Nozzle Cleaning ] and press the OK Button.
The Platen and the Carriage will move. The message is shown as below.

16. Open the Front Cover (Cover UF) with both hands until it is locked with the stopper.
17. Confirm the Nozzle Plate (12) is wiped clean with the hand mirror.
Crashless Plate (13) has an ink mark of the cap.
Confirm that the Wiper can wipe off the ink as shown in the right photo, where no ink pool left around the
tiny nozzles on the Nozzle Plate. Check quickly or the ink may run from the nozzles.
(12) (13)
(12)
18. Push the Stop Lever to release the lock when you close the Front Cover (Cover UF) with both hands.
19. Turn ON the printer, and initialization will start and the Carriage will move to the original position (on the
Maintenance Unit).
202 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-28. Adjusting the position of Wiper Blades

Required Tool
・ Phillips screwdriver
Disassembling
2. Remove the screws (2) that fix the W Motor Base Lower (1).
(1) (1)
(2) (2)
3. Fix the W Motor Base Unit Assy (1) by lifting at the position where the hitting position of W Drive Base B
Assy (3) and the W Drive Base F Assy (4) should be a little backward from the center (projection as a
guide) of the CL Guide Lower (approx. 0.3 mm).
(1)
0.3 mm
(5)
Center line
(4)
(3)
4. Tighten the screws (2) that fix the W Motor Base Lower (1), with tightening torque 1.5 N·m.
GT-3 Series 203

6. Replacing Parts
Reconfirmation
204 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-29. Wiper Motor

Required Tool
Phillips screwdriver
Disassembling
2. Remove the screws (2) that fix the W Motor Base Lower (1)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
3. Remove the Connector (3) and two screws (4).
(3)
(5)
(4)

1. Mount temporarily the new W Motor Base Unit Assy (5) to the W Motor Base Lower (1) with the two
screws (4), and connect the Connector (3).
2. Fix the W Motor Base Lower (1). (Refer to the step 3 and 4 in “6-1-28. Adjusting the position of Wiper
Blades”.)
3. Tighten the screws (4) at the position where the clearance of the Gears is evenly located, by moving the
W Motor Base Unit Assy (5) horizontally.
Reconfirmation
GT-3 Series 205

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-30. Waste Ink Tubes

Required Tool
Disassembling
2. Remove the two screws (1) that fix the Pump Holder from the both sides.
(1) (1)
3. Remove the Joint Tube (3) and the Capping Tube (4) from the T-shaped Tube Joint (2).
(2)
(3)
(4)
Tube Replacement for the open side

4. Pull out the Capping Tube (4) from the Tube Joint (6) in the Waste Ink Joint (5), and pull out the Plunger
Head (7) by pushing down. Pass through the new Capping Tube through the Bush (8) by pushing down
the Plunger Head (7) and connect the Tube Joint (6). The length of the Capping Tube should be 110 ± 5
mm from the edge of the Solenoid to the Pump side.
(8)
(6)
(5)
(7)
(4)
206 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
5. Remove the eight Capping Tubes (10) from the Y-shaped Tube Joints (9).
Remove the Capping Tube (10) by pushing down the Plunger Head (7) by hand.
(9)
(10)
(9)
(7)
Solenoid
6. Remove the Capping Tube (12) by pulling out the Cap Rubber Holder (11).
(11)
(12)
(13)
GT-3 Series 207

6. Replacing Parts

1. Prepare the new Capping Tubes. Mark the four Color Capping Tubes (front side) at the 180 mm position
and mark the four White Capping Tubes (back side) at the 247 mm position from the Cap side.
2. Insert the Capping Tube (1) to the Cap Rubber Holder (2) until you cannot see the edge.
3. Hold the Capping Holder (1) through the Spring Compression 8x15 (3).
(2)
(1)
(3)
4. Pull down the Plunger Head and pass through the eight Capping Tubes.
Make sure that the Capping Tubes should go straight down the Solenoid side when the Caps are in the
highest position, without sagging or bent.
180 ± 5 mm from the Cap to here
247 ± 5 mm from the Cap to here
Confirm the tube crossing as shown below.

Or the outer tubes of Color side may sag.
208 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
5. Connect the Y-shaped Tube Joints (4) and the Joint Tubes (5). Insert the Joint Tubes within 1 mm from
the edge.
(5)
(4)
6. Connect the Y-shaped Tube Joints (4) and the Capping Tubes (6). Make sure that those tubes should
cross as shown below.
(6) (4)
1mm or less
0025N
(4)
(6)
(4)
7. Connect the T-shaped Tube Joint (7) and the Connecting Tube (8), and the Capping Tube (9).
(7)
(8)
(9)
GT-3 Series 209

6. Replacing Parts
8. Insert the Pump Holder to the Frame and fix it with the two screws (10) from the both side, with tightening
torque 1.5 N·m.
(10) (10)
210 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-31. Solenoid for Head Cleaning

Required Tool
Disassembling
2. Remove the Harness: MNT Solenoid (1) from the Clip: CS-6U (2) and the Cord Clamp 13-L (3) バルブ
and remove the eight Connectors (4).
(1)
(4)
(3)
3. Remove the eight Capping Tubes from the Y-shaped Tube Joint. (Refer to the step 5 in “6-1-30. Waste
Ink Tubes”.)
4. Remove the four screws (5).
(6)
(5) (5)
GT-3 Series 211

6. Replacing Parts

1. Replace the Solenoid (7) from the Solenoid Base Bracket (6), with tightening torque 0.8 N·m.
Mount the Plunger Head (8) to the Plunger of the Solenoid (7) by pressing into the Pin Spring Roll AW3.
The direction of the Pin Spring Roll AW3 (9) is shown in the figure below.
Insert the Spring Compression 14x30 (10) between the Plunger Head (8) and the Solenoids (7).
The position of the Solenoids is shown in the table below:
From your side Front row Back row

Left edge SB2843001GT3 Solenoid K Assy SB2847001GT3 Solenoid W1 Assy
SB2845001GT3 Solenoid M Assy SB2848001GT3 Solenoid W2 Assy
SB2844001GT3 Solenoid C Assy SB2849001GT3 Solenoid W3 Assy
Right edge SB2846001GT3 Solenoid Y Assy SB2850001GT3 Solenoid W4 Assy
(8) (9) (6)

4X 4X
SA5988101 SA5989101
4X
SA5990001
4X
Do not protrude from both sides
(10) 047301242
(7) SB2843001 Position of

clearance
SB2846001 SB2845001
SB2844001
Tightening torque 0.8 N·m Direction of Clearance in assembling

0A5300806
SA6155001
4X
(8) (9) (6) 4X
SA5988101 SA5989101
4X
SA5990001 4X
047301242
(10)
SB2847001
(7)
SB2850001 SB2848001
SB2849001
Tightening torque 0.8 N·m

0A5300806
SA6155001
0024N
2. Mount the Solenoid Base Bracket (6) to the Frame with the screws (5), with tightening torque 1.5 N·m.
3. Connect the Harness: MNT Solenoid by checking the Tube Marks.
4. Fix the Harness: MNT Solenoid with the Clips CS-6U and the Cord Clamp 13-L.
5. Connect the eight Capping Tubes. (Refer to the Replacement & Assembling in “6-1-35. Waste Ink
Tubes”.)
212 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-32. Ink Supply Mechanism

Required tool
・ Wrench 10 (to unscrew nut 8)
・ Phillips screwdriver: M3 and M4
・ Radio pliers
・ Plastic gloves
<Note>
・ Pay maximum attention not to put dust or dirt into the Tubes.
・ Handle with care not to let you wet with Ink and Maintenance Solution running out from the Tubes.
・ Cover the edge of the Tubes with the Caps listed below:
VRS206+VRFP6 (for Tube) VRFP6+Tube (φ3mm, for Needle)
Disassembling
1. Flush the Ink inside the all Tubes.
The process is different between the Color Ink and the White Ink. Follow the process below:
Color Ink (Black, Magenta, Cyan and Yellow)

1) Turn ON the printer.
2) Replace all the Color Ink Cartridges into the Filter Cartridges.
3) Select [ Maintenance ] > [ Initial Cleaning ] and press the OK Button.
4) Select [ Colors ] > [ All Colors ] with Up/Down Buttons and press the OK Button. Ink starts to flush.
5) After the operation is finished, turn OFF the printer.
 Confirm all Tubes are empty by opening the Front Cover UF.
 If the ink still remains, then close the Front Cover UF and execute the steps 3 and 4 again.
White Ink (GT-381: W1, W2, W3 and W4, GT-361: W1 and W2)
1) Turn ON the printer.
2) Replace all the White Ink Cartridges into the Filter Cartridges W.
3) Select [ Maintenance ] > [ Load White ] and press the OK Button.
4) Select [ All Whites ] with Up/Down Buttons and press the OK Button. Ink starts to flush.
5) After the operation is finished, turn OFF the printer.
 Confirm all Tubes are empty by opening the Front Cover UF.
 If the ink still remains, then close the Front Cover UF and execute the steps 3 and 4 again.
2. Dismount the Cover Cartridge. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling of the Covers”.)
GT-3 Series 213

6. Replacing Parts
3.. Loosen the Screw (2) and remove the Guard Bar (1). Use a coin to loosen the Screw (2).
(1)
(2)
4. Remove the five screws (3) and dismount the Cartridge Front Cover.
(3)
(3)
5. Remove the two Screws (3) and remove the two Clamps, NK-18N (4).
(4)
(3)
6. Remove the four Screws (5) to loose the two Tube Holder Fixes (6).
<Note> Do not disassemble the Tubes from the Tube Holder Fixes.
(6)
(5)
214 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
7.. Remove the Connector (8) of the Harness: Ink MNT from the Ink Switch PCB Assy (7).
(7)
(8) (7)
8. Loosen the Tube Clamp D3 Supply that fixes the Needles and Tubes, and disconnect the Tubes. Cover
the Tubes and the connecting tip (9) of the Needle with some joint.
(9)
Nut 8
Washer Plain 5 8
9. Remove the two Bolt Sockets (10). Remove the Bolt Socket (12) that supports Ink Cartridge Base Unit
(11). Loosen the Bolt Socket (13).
Lift up the Ink Cartridge Base and pull it out from the hook slot (hole) (14) and disassemble from the
printer.
<Note>
The weight of the Ink Cartridge Base Unit plus eight Ink Cartridges will be approx. 10 kg. Handle with
care.
10 kg
(11)
(12)
(13)
(10)
(14)
GT-3 Series 215

6. Replacing Parts
Disassembling and assembling the Ink Cartridge Base Unit
(10)
(3)
Boss section (9)
(1)
(8)
(1) (7)
(5) (14) (13)
(4)
(2)
Boss section
3
(15) (12)
(2) (16)
(16)
(6) (14) (13) (11)
(15)
(18)
Ink Switch Dog section
(17)
Boss section
(2)
(4) (19) 12 Mounting
Ink Cartridge Base

18 Mounting position
Procedure
1. Remove the eight Connectors of the Harness: Ink Sensor (1) form the Ink Sensor PCB Assy (2).
2. Remove the four screws (3) and remove the Ink Switch Dog.
<Note>
There are three types for mounting the Ink Switch Dog: Pattern 1, 2 and 3. (Refer to “6-1-34. Ink Switch
Dog”.)
3. Remove the eight Screws (4) and dismount the eight Ink Sensor PCB Assys (2).
4. Remove the eight Screws (7) and dismount the Connecting Plate (8).
5. Remove the eight Screws (9) and dismount the Back Connecting Plate (10).
6. Remove the three Screws (5) and dismount the Needle Bracket (6).
<Note>
 Pay attention not to put dust or dirt into the Needles. Cover the edge of the Tubes with the Caps listed
below.
 Disassemble the Needle Bracket (6) here if necessary. (Refer to “6-1-36. Needles”.)
216 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
7. Remove the two Screws (11) to dismount the five Cartridge Holder C Assys (12).
8. Remove the Screw (13) and remove the Spring Plate 10X0.8 from the Cartridge Holder C Assy (12).
9. Remove the two Screws (15) and remove the two Spring Plates 8X.08 from the Cartridge Holder C Assy
(12).
10. Remove the two Screws (17) and dismount the three Cartridge Holder W Assys (18).
11. Remove the Screw (13) and remove the Spring Plate 10X0.8 (14) from the Cartridge Holder W Assy (18).
12. Remove the two Screws (15) and remove the two Spring Plates 8X0.8 (16) from the Cartridge Holder W
Assy (18).
<Note>
 Execute those steps 7 to 12, remove the Filter Cartridge one by one when you disassemble one
Cartridge Holder C/W Assy.
 Pay attention not to put dust or dirt into the Needles. Cover the edge of the Tubes with the Caps listed
below.
13. Replace the eight Felts (19) if they are dirty with ink.
Refer to “6-1-43. Felts for Cartridge Base” for details.
14. Execute the reverse steps of 1-12 when you assemble the Ink Cartridge Base Unit.
<Note>
・ When you assemble the Ink Sensor PCB Assy (2), set the holes of the Connecting Plate (8) with the
bosses of the Cartridge Holder C Assy (12) and the Cartridge Holder W Assy (18) and tighten them
with the Screws (4).
・ When you assemble the Connecting Plate (8), set the holes of the Connecting Plate (8) with the
bosses of the Cartridge Holder C Assy (12) and the Cartridge Holder W Assy (18) and tighten them
with the eight Screws (7).
・ When you assemble the Back Connecting Plate (10), set the holes of the Back Connecting Plate (10)
with the bosses of the Cartridge Holder C Assy (12) and the Cartridge Holder W Assy (18) and tighten
them with the eight Screws (9).
・ Follow the order of the screwing the three screws (5) when you assemble the Needle Bracket (6); first
tighten the screws of both sides, then tighten the center screw.
<Note> The tightening torque of the screws should be 0.5 N·m.
GT-3 Series 217

6. Replacing Parts
Disassembling and assembling of the Ink Switch Dog Unit

(2)
(3)
(1)
(7)
(8) (4)
(9)
(10) (5)
(6) *
(11)
(12)
Be sure to put the Ink Switch Dog Unit on the table as shown in the photo above in operation.
Procedure
1. Remove the eight Connectors of the Harness: Ink Sensor (1) form the Ink Sensor PCB Assy (2).
2. Remove the six screws(3) and dismount the Ink Switch PCB Assy (2)
3. Remove the six Spacers M3-11 (4) and remove the six Washer Springs (5) and the Washer Plains (6).
<Note>
(6) *: Some machines have triple Washer Plains (6) piled; confirm when you disassemble.
4. Remove the eight sets of Ink Switch Spring Supports (7), Spring Compressions 4.1X15.9 (8) and Ink
Switch Dog (9).
5. Remove the eight Retaining Rings C5TW-12 (10), and remove the Ink Switch Guide Bushings (11) from
the Ink Switch 1 Bracket (12). (Refer to “6-1-34. Ink Switch Dog”.)
6. Assemble by the reverse process of the step 1-5 above.
<Note>
Follow the order of the screwing the six screws (3) when you assemble the Ink Switch PCB Assy (2); first
mount the screws of both sides ((3) in the photo below), then tighten the rest of four screws.
<Note> The tightening torque of the screws should be 0.5 N·m.
(3)
218 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
Assembling
1. Mount the Ink Cartridge Base Unit on the printer in the reverse process of the step 9 in “Disassembling”.
2. Follow the reverse process of the step 5-8 in “Disassembling”, connect the Tubes with the Needles, and
connect the Harness: Ink MNT, and mount the two Tube Holder Fixes and the Clamps NK-18N.
3. Connect the Tubes with the Needles by referring to “6-1-36. Needles”.
4. Mount the Carriage Front Cover and Guard Bar in the reverse process of the steps 3 and 4 in
“Disassembling”. Remove all the Filter Cartridges from the Ink Cartridge Base Unit and mount the
Cartridge Front Cover. Then insert the Filter Cartridges again.
5. Mount the Cover Cartridge. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling of the Covers”.)
Confirmation
1. Confirm the Ink Switch that you replaced. See the example “W2”:
(1) Turn ON the printer.

(2) Remove the Filter Cartridge W2 by 5 cm and confirm the Panel if it is indicated as [Error: No Ink W2].
2. Insert the Filter Cartridge to the end and confirm it the error above disappears.
3. Load the Ink inside the Tubes. The process is different between the Color Ink and the White Ink. Follow
the process in “2-6-2. Installing Ink”. Prepare the Maintenance Cartridge W and Maintenance Solution for
White Ink.
4. When all the inks are filled with the Tubes, print the Nozzle Check Pattern to confirm the print quality.
(Refer to “2-6-3. Test Print”).
GT-3 Series 219

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-33. Replacing the Filter on the Print Head

Replace the Filter before replacing the Print Head when you find a large number of missing nozzles in
printing; the print is getting lost in printing Solid test pattern and there may be clogged ink covering the F/E
Filter inside the Print Head (see “4-1-2. Heavy misfiring in printing (Checking the Cracks in the Tube”).
6-1-33-1. Replacing the Filter for CMYK

Confirm that the firmware should be ver. 2.10 or higher.
<Note>
Be sure to wear the gloves in operation to keep pretreatment from the skin, as well as to prevent the ink
contamination with dust and oil in the Tubes.
<Requirements>
Some soft and clean cloths (several sheets)
<black /cyan>
<magenta/yellow>
10μm
1. Turn OFF the printer, and open the Front Cover with both hands until it is locked with the stopper.
2. Put on the gloves. Cover the Print Heads and the Carriage with a soft and clean cloth (1) so that the ink
may not make them dirty as well as some parts may not drop inside the printer.
The printed surface on the top
77 mm
67 mm
(1)
220 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
3. Rotate the Tube Connector (2) (small white part over the Print Head) by 90 degrees (left figure), lift it
straight up slowly and remove the Tube from the Print Head (right figure). Remove the Tube Connector
(2).
<Note>
You can decrease the ink drop coming out of the Tube when you wait about 20 seconds before going to
the next step 4. (The following photos show the Yellow as the example.)
(2)
(2)
4. Rotate the top of the Filter (3) to the direction of the arrow and remove it from the Tube.
<Note>
Cover the Tube with a soft and clean cloth to catch the ink drops coming out of the Tube.
(3)
Watch the ink drop
5. Prepare the new Filter. Insert the Filter to the upper tube and rotate the two joints (upper and the bottom
of the Filter) by 30-45 degrees.
<Note> Confirm the connection; there may be cause loose (slow) ink introduction or missing nozzles.
Rotate the top and the bottom of the Filter.
GT-3 Series 221

6. Replacing Parts
6. Connect the Tube on the Print Head. Insert the Tube Connector (2) to the Tube; insert the Tube slowly
and straight to the Print Head (left figure). Confirm that the edge of the Tube can reach to the Print Head.
Rotate the Tube Connector (2) by 90 degrees (right figure) to fix the Tube.
(2)
(2)
7. Remove the gloves.

8. Push the Stop Lever to release the lock when you close the Front Cover with both hands and then turn
ON the printer.
9. Reset the warning after you replace the Filter.
(Select [Maintenance] > [Reset CMYK Filter] from the menu, select the color and press the OK Button.)
10. Load the ink inside the Tubes. (Select [Maintenance] > [Initial Cleaning] > [Color] from the menu, select
the color and press the OK Button. It takes approx. 2 minutes for one color.)
11. Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to confirm the print quality. (Refer to “7-2-3. Checking Print Quality with
Nozzle Check Pattern” and “7-2-1. Procedure for solving the Print Quality Problems” in the Instruction
Manual. )
<Note>
There may be air coming from the joint part of the Filter after you replace and find missing nozzles in
operation. Confirm if the Tube is filled with ink with no air, the connection is firmly fixed. Execute the previous
steps 10 and 11 to re-load the ink.
222 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-33-2. Replacing the Filter for White

<Note>
Confirm that the firmware should be ver. 2.10 or higher.
No instruction sheet is packed in the supply parts.
0076Y
0192Y
1. Execute the White Tube Cleaning.

Fill the bottle with Maintenance Solution. Confirm that at least more than 250 ml per one Print Head is in
the bottle.
5. Select the Print Head [ White-1 (or White-2 to White-4) ] to be replaced then the message [ Set
Maintenance Cartridge ] is indicated. Remove the White Ink Cartridge of W1 and insert the Maintenance
Cartridge to W1 slot and press OK Button.
<Note> Confirm that the tube of the Maintenance Cartridge reaches to the bottom of the bottle.
pump starts turning to load the Maintenance Solution.
0193Y
7. After 30 seconds, when the peep sounds ring, the message [ Open Air-in Cap ] is indicated on the
Control Panel. Uncap (open) the air-in cap and press OK button. The air goes into the tube and washes
away the remained White Ink. It takes about 10 minutes to wash one tube.
0194Y
GT-3 Series 223

6. Replacing Parts
8. After washing with air bubbles, when the peep sounds ring, the message [ Insert Filter Cartridge ] is
indicated on the Control Panel. Remove the Maintenance Cartridge of the W1 position and insert the
Filter Cartridge and press the OK button. The air from the Filter Cartridge flushes the bubbles inside the
Tube.
9. With the peep sounds, the message [ Insert Maintenance Cartridge ] is indicated on the Control Panel.
Press the Stop Button to cancel the rest.
(1)
straight up slowly and remove the Tube from the Print Head.
Remove the Tube Connector (2).
(2) (2)
13. Remove the Filter Assy mounted on the printer.

Disconnect the connection by rotating the top of the Joint.
224 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
14. Connect the Filter Assy.

Insert the Joint softly by hand and rotate it by 30-45 degrees.
Screw softly with hand.
<Note> Confirm the connection; there may be cause loose (slow) ink introduction or missing nozzles.
15. Connect the Tube on the Print Head.

Insert the Tube Connector (2) to the Tube; insert the Tube slowly and straight to the Print Head (left
figure). Confirm that the edge of the Tube can reach to the Print Head. Rotate the Tube Connector (2) by
90 degrees (right figure) to fix the Tube.
(2)
16. Remove the gloves.

17. Push the Stop Lever to release the lock when you close the Front Cover with both hands and then turn
ON the printer.
18. Load the White Ink. Remove the Filter Cartridge and insert the well-agitated White Ink Cartridge to the
slot.
19. Select [ Maintenance ] > [ Initial Cleaning ] and the replaced Print Head [ White-1 (or White-2 to
White-4) ] from the menu and load the ink.
20. Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to confirm the print quality. (Refer to “7-2-3. Checking Print Quality with
Nozzle Check Pattern” and “7-2-1. Procedure for solving the Print Quality Problems” in the Instruction
Manual. )
<Note>
There may be air coming from the joint part of the Filter after you replace and find missing nozzles in
operation. Confirm if the Tube is filled with ink with no air, if the ink is filled to the replaced Print Head, if the
connection of the top and the bottom of the Filter is firmly fixed. Execute the previous steps 19 and 20 to
re-load the ink.
GT-3 Series 225

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-34. Ink Switch Dog

Required Tool
・ Phillips screwdriver Plus
・ Flathead screwdriver
・ Radio Pliers
・ Gloves
When you replace the Ink Switch Dog, first remove the Ink Switch Dog Unit (A) in the photo below from the
printer and put them on the table for operation.
Pay attention for those small parts (e.g. springs).
(A)
There are three adjusted types of mounting Ink Switch Dog Unit (A) in the following photos, the relations
between the oval hole (1) and the Screw (2), Pattern 1: the Center type (left photo), Pattern2: the Left type
(center photo) and Pattern 3: the Right type (right photo).
Confirm before you unscrew, and be sure to fix them as they were.
Center type Left type Right type

(1)
(2)
Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3

(Center type) (Left type) (Right type)
226 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
Disassembling
1. Remove the Cover Cartridge. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling of the Covers”.)
2. Confirm the pattern of the Ink Switch Dog Unit; Center type, Left type or Right type.
3. Remove the two Screws (3) and the remove the two Cord Holders: NK-18N (4).
<Note> Depending on the unit, there are no Cord Holders: NK-18N (4) mounted originally.
(4)
(3)
4. Remove the four Screws (5) and make the two Tube Holder Fixes (6) free.
Do not remove the Tubes from the Tube Holder Fixes.
(5)
(6)
5. Remove the eight Connectors (8) of the Harness: Ink Sensor from the Ink Sensor PCB Assy (7).
(8)
(7)
GT-3 Series 227

6. Replacing Parts
6. Remove the Connector (1) of the Harness: Ink MNT from the Ink Switch PCB Assy (9).
(9)
(10)
7. Remove the two Screws (11).
(11)
(11)
8. Hold the Ink Sensor Switch Dog Unit with your hand shown in the photo below, and remove the two
Screws (12) at the both ends.
(12)
(12)
228 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
9. Rotate the Ink Switch Dog Unit (A) to the direction shown by the arrow and shift it to the upper direction.
Remove it by pulling it out from the clearance between the Tubes and the Connecting Plate (14).
Pay attention not to pull out the Tubes, not to pull out the Harness: Ink Sensor.
(14)
(A)
10. Remove the six Screws (15) and remove the Ink Switch PCB Assy (13) from the Ink Switch Dog Unit (A).
(13)
(13)
(15)
(A)
11. Remove the Ink Switch Spring Support (16), Spring Compression 4.1X15.9 (17) and the Ink Switch Dog
(18) in order. Remove the Retaining Ring CSTW-12 (20) from the Ink Switch Guide Bushing (19) and
remove it from Ink Switch 1 Bracket (21).
(19)
(20) (21)
(18)
(17)
(16)
GT-3 Series 229

6. Replacing Parts
Assembling
How to assemble the Ink Switch Guide Bush

Be sure to use the new Retaining Ring CSTW-12 in assembling.
Insert the projecting portion (2) of the Ink Switch Guide Bush into the groove (1) on the Ink Switch 1 Bracket
and fix the new Retaining Ring CSTW-12. Make sure that there is no play between the Ink Switch 1 Bracket
and the Ink Switch Guide Bush.
(1)
(2)
(3)
How to assemble the Ink Switch Dog and Ink Switch Spring Support
Assemble the Ink Switch Dog and then the Spring Compression 4.1X15.9 as shown in the photos below.
Insert and fix the convex part of the Ink Switch Guide Bush to the groove on the Ink Switch Spring Support.
(4)
(5)
(4)
230 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
1. Fix the Ink Switch PCB Assy with the six Screws.
Follow the order of those six Screws in the photo below; first fix the red marked two screws and then fix
the yellow marked screws later.
(1) (2)
2. Lift up slightly the Tubes in the photo below, and follow the reverse steps in the Step 9 in Disassembling.
Then fix the four Screws by following the Step 8 and 7 in Disassembling. Confirm the original position
indicated in the first page of “6-1-34. Ink Switch Dog” (Center type, Left type, Right type).
<Note> Handle the Tubes with care; the Tubes are easily kinked and may be damaged in lifting.
3. Connect the Connector by following the reverse steps in Step 6 and 5 of Disassembling.
4. Mount the two Tube Holder Fixes and the two Cord Holders: NK-18N by following the reverse steps in
Step 4 and 3 of Disassembling.
<Note> Depending on the unit, there are no Cord Holders: NK-18N (4) mounted originally.
<Note> Confirm that the Tubes in position A should not be bitten in assembling.
(3)
(A)
(A)
(A)

6. Confirm if the replaced Ink Switch can work.
(1) Turn On the printer.
(2) Pull out the target Ink Cartridge by 5 cm and confirm if the indication on the Display shows No ink
cartridge.
(3) Insert the Ink Cartridge to the end and confirm if the indication on the Display shows the cartridge is in.
GT-3 Series 231

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-35. Tubes
0195Y
<Note>
・ Take care not to bend or crush the Tubes; they are very fragile, especially a new Tube. Handle with care
and keep the minimum bending radius by 50 mm or more.
・ Replace to a new Tube if bent or damaged.
・ Open the Caps of the Maintenance Unit to move down the Carriage by hand, otherwise the Print Head
may be seriously damaged.
・ The surface of Print Heads will be dried and clogged in operation because they have to be left with
"cap-open". Operate as quickly as you can, and be sure to cap them again on the Maintenance Unit and
do head cleaning after operation.
・ Move the Wiper back and forth to wet the surface of the Print Head Nozzles, to protect Print Heads from
clogging. Better to operate in higher humidity.
・ Dirt or dust produced during work may result in Print Head malfunction, and therefore due care should be
exercised.
・ Take a photo first before you replace, so that you can check the layout later.
・ Cap the protection cap at both ends of the Tube after all the operation is finished to keep the inside clean.
Pay maximum attention not to put dust or dirt into the Tubes. Handle with care not to let you wet with Ink
and Maintenance Solution running out from the Tubes. Cover the edge of the Tubes with the Caps listed
below:
・For covering:
Tube Joint 2 *VRFP6 (SA5905) (1)
Tube Joint VRSP6 (SB0644) (2)
VRFP6 VRSP6
<Note>
Wash the ink and dust and flush with distilled water before you re-use the Tube Joints. Keep away from the
dust in storage.
232 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
Follow the Tube Layout Chart and mark the positions on the new Tube.
<Note>
There are two types of marking layout; for the Color side and the White side.
GT-3 Series 233

6. Replacing Parts
A. White Tube
A1. Replacing the Main Tube (Tube D3XL1600)
<Note>
The Tubes above the Filter (W1/W3:SB4061, W2/W4:SB4062) are assembled with the Filter. Refer to “A2.
Replacing the Tube connecting to the White Print Head“ for details.
Disassembling
<Flushing the ink inside the Tube to be replaced>
1. Confirm if there should be enough room in the Waste Ink Tank (more than 500ml).
3. Remove the target Ink Cartridge and insert the Filter Cartridge W.
4. Select [Maintenance] > [Load White] from the Menu and press the OK Button.
5. Select the target color with UP/DOWN Button and press the OK button. The ink starts to be flushed.
6. Turn OFF the printer after operation.
<Note>
・Confirm if all the ink inside the Tube should be flushed by opening the Front Cover UF.
・If you find the ink is left inside the Tube, close the Front Cover UF and repeat the step 2 to 6 until all the
ink is flushed out.
7. Remove the Front Cover UF, Cover UB and Cover Cartridge. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/
Disassembling of the Covers”.)
8. Unlock the (1) as shown in the photo below.
(1)
(2)
234 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
10. Remove the one Screw (3) and remove the Tube Holder Outside (4).
<Note> Pay attention to the screws not to drop; spread some paper or cloth.
(3)
(4)
11. Shift the Tube from the U groove (5) in the Tube Holder Inside.
(6)
(5)
12. Remove the Tube from the Joint VRFT6 (6).
<Note>
・Rotate the Joint VRFT 6 to the arrow direction in the photo by holding the fitting position of the Tube; Do
not hold the Tube itself, it may be damaged.
・Pay attention to the ink flowing out from the Tube in disconnecting; it may give damage to your hands,
the printer and the table.
Do not give stress to the upper and

(6) lower Tubes in disconnecting; it may
be damaged.
GT-3 Series 235

6. Replacing Parts
13. Insert the Joint VRSP6 (7) to cover the Tube where you removed the Tube from the Joint VRFT6 (6).
(6)
(7)
14. Remove the one Bolt Socket (8) and pull up the Tube Holder Support (10) from the Tube Holder Support
Shaft (9).
<Note> Pay attention not to hook the Tubes in operation.

(8) (10)
(9)
(6)
(11)
236 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
16. Remove the one Screw (12) and remove the Tube Holder Outside (13).
(12)
(13)
<Removing the two Clamps NK-18N (14) and the two Tube Holder Fixes (15)>
(B)
(A)
(15)
(14)
(C)
(14)
(15)
<Note>
Do not drop Two Washers (17).
17. Remove the one Screw (16) and remove the Clamp NK-18N (14).
<Note> Do not drop the two Washers (17) at the bottom.
(A)
(14)
(16)
(17)
GT-3 Series 237

6. Replacing Parts
18. Remove the two Screws (18) and remove the Tube Holder Fix (15).
(15)
(18)
19. Remove the one Screw (19) and Clamp NK-18N (14).
<Note>
The recent productions have neither Screw (19) nor Clamp, NK-18N (14) mounted.
(14)
(19)
(20)
(15)
238 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
21. Remove the Tube from the Tube Holder Fix (15).
(15)
22. Loosen the Tube Clamp D3 (21) and remove the Tube.
<Note> Pay attention to the ink flowing out from the Tube in disconnecting; it may give damage to your
hands, the printer and the table.
(21)
23. Cover the needle with the protection (cut tube) to protect from the dust and threads.
Tube Joint 2:*VRFP6 Protection (cut tube)
24. Remove the old Tube from the printer.
<Note> Pay attention not to pull out the other Tubes; do not give damage to the other Tubes in operation.
GT-3 Series 239

6. Replacing Parts
Assembling
1. Mark the fixing positions (A) on the new Tube following the Tube Layout Chart.
<Note>
・The starting position of measuring is the edge of the Fitting (position B).
・Put the Tube on the table and make it “naturally” straight to mark on the right positions; do not pull it out
by force or the Tube may be stretched and the marking positions may shift.
Mark by the Tube Layout Chart.

(B)
(A)
2. Remove the Round Tube Holder (1), the Middle Tube (2) and the Spiral 258 (3) from the old Tube.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(2)
3. Grip the new Tube with the Middle Tube (2) and the Round Tube Holder (1).
<Note> Confirm that the slit of the Middle Tube (2) should be in the center of the open space of the
Round Tube Holder (1).
240 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
4. Mount the Spiral 258 (3) on the Tube.
<Note> Wrap the Spiral 258 (3) over the Middle Tube (2) and prevent its edge from touching the Tube
directly.
OK NG
5. Remove the Joint VRSP6 (7) to cover the Tube and connect the Tube to the Joint VRFT6 (4).
<Note> Rotate the Joint by 30-40 degrees where you insert. Do not twist or push in, otherwise the Joint
may be damaged.
(4)
6. Fix the Tube with the Wire Saddle (5).
(5)
GT-3 Series 241

6. Replacing Parts
7. Follow the Tube layout as shown in the bottom photos.
Ｗ4
Ｗ3
Ｗ2
Ｗ1
Ｗ1
Ｗ2
Ｗ3
Ｗ4
Ｗ1 Ｗ2
Ｗ3
Ｗ4
Ｗ4
Ｗ3
Ｗ2
Ｗ1
242 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
8. Mount the Tube Holder Outside (6) with the one Screw (7).
(7)
(6)
9. Fix them with the two Screws (8).
(8)
10. Mount the Tube Holder Support (9) on the Tube Holder Support Shaft (10) and fix them with the one Bolt
Socket (11).

(9) (11)
(10)
GT-3 Series 243

6. Replacing Parts
11. Wrap the Tube with the Tube Holder Unit as shown in the figure below.
The Slit of the Round Tube Holder
12. Fix the Tube Holder Fix (12) with the two Screws (13).
(12) (13)
3~7 mm
13. Fix the other Tube Holder Fix (12) with the two Screws (14).
(14)
(12)
244 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
14. Fix the Clamp NK-18N (15) with the one Screw (16).
<Note> Do not drop the two Washer Plains M4 at the bottom.
(15)
(16)
(17)
15. Fix the other Clamp NK-18N (15) with the one Screw (18).
<Note>
Pay attention not to hook the Tubes in operation.
(15)
(18)
NG (Jammed)
16. Remove the protection of the needle and insert the Tube.
<Note> Pay attention not to get the dust and threads into the inside of the needle.
GT-3 Series 245

6. Replacing Parts
17. Apply some distilled water around the outside of Tube (C).
<Note>
Without distilled water, Tube may move round with Tube Clamp and it may kink.
Do not put distilled water INSIDE the tube, the ink may be damaged.
(C)
18. Fix the Tube with the Tube Clamp D3 (19).
<Note> Insert the Tube and Tube Clamp D3 (19) until the edge of the Tube Clamp D will touch the nut 8
(20).
(20)
(19)
(19)
Until both edges can touch each other
19. Remove the two Screws (21) and remove the Maintenance Cover (22).
(22)
(21)
246 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
20. Rotate the Gear (23) inside with your hand to move the Caps down.
(23)
21. Move the Carriage (24) with your hand and confirm if the Tubes are moving smoothly; no kink, no stretch,
no touching or no damage.
(24)
Confirm not to touch with other parts
GT-3 Series 247

6. Replacing Parts
22. Move the Carriage (24) back to the Maintenance Position and move up the Caps by rotating the Gear.
<Note>
Confirm the clearance by 10 mm between the Carriage Guide Shaft Support (25) and the Carriage (24).
(25) (24)
23. Mount the Maintenance Cover (22) with the two Screws (21).
(22)
(21)
24. Mount the Front Cover UF, Cover UB and the Cover Cartridge. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/
26. Load the Maintenance Solution first and then load the White Ink. (Refer to “2-6-2.Installing Ink”.)
248 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
A2. Replacing the Tube connecting to the White Print Head
<Note>
The Filter on the White Side was revised to have higher filtering of the White Ink. The new and the previous
Filter Assys are compatible. Mount the new type when you replace the Filter. Refer to the steps in “6-1-33-2.
Replacing the Filter for White”.
Parts Code for the revised type:

For W1 / W3: SB4061
For W2 / W4: SB4062
The previous type The revised type
If you replace the whole Tubes as well as the Filter Assy and you have already removed the Ink inside the
Tube, refer to the step 10 in “6-1-33-2. Replacing the Filter for White”.
B. Color Tube
B1. Replacing the Main Tube (Tube D3XL1600)

<Note>
Be sure to arrange and replace the Tube connecting to the Color Print Head (K/C: SB3964, M/Y: SB3966) as
well as Color Filter (K/C: SB3987, M/Y: SB3988). Refer to “B2. Replacing the Tube connecting to the Color
Print Head“ for details.
Disassembling
<Flushing the ink inside the Tube to be replaced>
1. Confirm if there should be enough room in the Waste Ink Tank (more than 500ml).
3. Remove the target Ink Cartridge and insert the Filter Cartridge Color.
4. Select [Maintenance] > [Load White] from the Menu and press the OK Button.
5. Select the target color with UP/DOWN Button and press the OK button. The ink starts to be flushed.
6. Turn OFF the printer after operation. Confirm if all the ink inside the Tube should be flushed by opening
the Front Cover UF. If you find the ink is left inside the Tube, close the Front Cover UF and repeat the
step 2 to 6 until all the ink is flushed out.
7. Remove the Front Cover UF, Cover UB and Cover Cartridge. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling /
GT-3 Series 249

6. Replacing Parts
<Note> Do not drop the Holder Plate (2) in operation.
(1)
(2)
9. Remove the one screw (3) and remove the Tube Holder Outside (4).
(3)
(4)
10. Shift the Tube from the U groove (5) in the Tube Holder Inside.
<Note> Hold the Tube Holder Outside (4) temporarily with TAPTITE Band P M3X8 (3) to prevent Tubes
from slipping.
(5)
250 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
11. Remove the one Bolt Socket (6) and pull up the Tube Holder Support (7) from the Tube Holder Support
Shaft.
(7)
(6)
(8)
13. Remove the one screw (9) and remove the Tube Holder Outside (10).
(10)
(9)
GT-3 Series 251

6. Replacing Parts
<Removing the two Clamps NK-18N (11) and the two Tube Holder Fixes (12)>
(B)
(A)
(12)
(11)
(C)
(12) (11)
<Note>
Do not drop Two Washer Plains M4 (14)
14. Remove the one Screw (13) and remove the Clamp NK-18N (11).
<Note> Do not drop the two Washer Plains M4 (14) at the bottom.
(A)
(11)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(12)
252 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
16. Remove the one Screw (16) and Clamp NK-18N (11).
<Note>
The recent productions have neither Screw (16) nor Clamp, NK-18N (11) mounted. .
(11)
(16)
(17)
(12)
18. Remove the Tube from the Tube Holder Fix (12).
(12)
GT-3 Series 253

6. Replacing Parts
19. Loosen the Tube Clamp D3 (18) and remove the Tube.
<Note> Pay attention to the ink flowing out from the Tube in disconnecting; it may give damage to your
hands, the printer and the table.
(18)
20. Cover the needle with the protection (cut tube) to protect from the dust and threads.
Protection (cut tube)
Tube Joint2
*VRFP6
21. Unlock the Wire Saddle (19) as shown in the photo below.
(19) (19)
254 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
22. Remove the Tube from the Tube Joint VRFE6 (20).
<Note>
・ Rotate the Joint VRFT 6 to the arrow direction in the photo by holding the fitting position of the Tube.
・ Pay attention to the ink flowing out from the Tube in disconnecting; it may give damage to your hands,
the printer and the table.
(20)
Do not give stress to the upper and

lower Tubes in disconnecting; it may be
damaged.
23. Insert the Tube Joint VRSP6 (21) for protection into the Joint VRFE6 (20).
(21)
24. Remove the old Tube from the printer.
GT-3 Series 255

6. Replacing Parts
Assembling
1. Mark the fixing positions (A) on the new Tube following the Tube Layout Chart.
<Note>
・ The starting position of measuring is the edge of the Fitting (position B).
・ Put the Tube on the table and make it “naturally” straight to mark on the right positions; do not pull it
out by force or the Tube may be stretched and the marking positions may shift.
Mark by the Tube Layout Chart.
(B)
(A)
2. Remove the Round Tube Holder (1), the Middle Tube (2) and the Spiral 258 (3) from the old Tube.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(2)
3. Grip the new Tube with the Middle Tube (2) and the Round Tube Holder (1).
<Note> Confirm that the slit of the Middle Tube (2) should be in the center of the open space of the
Round Tube Holder (1).
4. Mount the Spiral 258 (3) on the Tube.
<Note> Wrap the Spiral 258 (3) over the Middle Tube (2) and prevent its edge from touching the Tube
directly.
OK NG
256 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
5. Remove the Joint VRSP6 (7) to cover the Tube and connect the Tube to the Joint VRFT6 (4).
<Note> Rotate the Joint by 30-40 degrees where you insert. Do not twist or push in, otherwise the Joint
may be damaged.
(4)
Do not give stress to the Tube in operation.
6. Fix the Tube with the Wire Saddle (5).

(5)
7. Follow the Tube layout as shown in the bottom photos.
Y
C
M
K
M
C
Y
GT-3 Series 257

6. Replacing Parts
Y
C
Y
C
M
K
8. Mount the Tube Holder Outside (6) with the one screw (7).
(7)
(6)
9. Fix them with the two Screws (8).
(8)
258 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
10. Mount the Tube Holder Support (9) on the Tube Holder Support Shaft (10) and fix them with the one Bolt
Socket (11).
(11)
(9)
(10)
11. Wrap the Tube with the Tube Holder Unit as shown in the figure below.
The Slit of the Round Tube Holder
12. Fix the Tube Holder Fix (12) with the two Screws (13).
(12) (13)
3~7 mm
GT-3 Series 259

6. Replacing Parts
13. Fix the other Tube Holder Fix (12) with the two Screws (14).
(14)
(12)
14. Fix the Clamp NK-18N (15) with the one Screw (16).
<Note> Do not drop the two Washer Plains M4 at the bottom.
(15)
(16)
(17)
15. Fix the other Clamp NK-18N (15) with the one Screw (18).
<Note>
Pay attention not to hook the Tubes in operation.
(15)
(18)
NG (Jammed)
)
260 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
16. Remove the protection of the needle and insert the Tube.
<Note> Pay attention not to get the dust and threads into the inside of the needle.
17. Apply some distilled water around the outside of Tube (C).
<Note>
・Without distilled water, Tube may move round with Tube Clamp and it may kink.
・Do not put distilled water INSIDE the tube, the ink may be damaged.
(C)
18. Fix the Tube with the Tube Clamp D3 (19).
<Note> Insert the Tube and Tube Clamp D3 (19) until the edge of the Tube Clamp D will hit the nut 8 (20).
(20)
(19) (19)
Until both edges can touch each other
GT-3 Series 261

6. Replacing Parts
19. Remove the two Screws (21) and remove the Maintenance Cover (22).
(22)
(21)
20. Rotate the Gear (23) inside with your hand to move the Caps down.
(23)
21. Move the Carriage (24) with your hand and confirm if the Tubes are moving smoothly; no kink, no stretch,
no touching or no damage.
(24)
262 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
Confirm not to touch with other parts
22. Move the Carriage (24) back to the Maintenance Position and move up the Caps by rotating the Gear.
<Note>
Confirm the clearance by 10 mm between the Carriage Guide Shaft Support (25) and the Carriage (24).
10 mm
(25) (24)
23. Mount the Maintenance Cover (22) with the two Screws (21).
(22)
(21)
24. Mount the Front Cover UF, Cover UB and the Cover Cartridge. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/
26. Load the Maintenance Solution first and then load the White Ink. (Refer to “2-6-2.Ink Installation”.)
GT-3 Series 263

6. Replacing Parts
B2. Replacing the Tube connecting to the Color Print Head (K/C: SB3964, M/Y: SB3966)
<Note>
 Be sure to replace the Color Filter (K/C: SB3987, M/Y: SB3988) and the Tube connecting to the Color
Print Head (K/C: SB3964, M/Y: SB3966) when you replace the Main Tube and Print Head.
 Refer to “6-1-33-1. Replacing the Filter for CMYK” for replacing the Filter for CMYK.
Disassembling
The printed surface on the top
77 mm
67 mm
(1)
straight up slowly and remove the Tube from the Print Head (right figure). Remove the Tube Connector
(2).
<Note>
You can decrease the ink drop coming out of the Tube when you wait about 20 seconds before going to
the next step 4. (The following photos show the Yellow as the example.)
(2)
(2)
264 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
4. Remove the Tube and the Filter from the Joint VRFE6 (3).
<Note>
 Hold the Fitting position of the Tube and rotate it to the direction of the arrow.
 Pay attention to the tubes not to drop; spread some paper or cloth to absorb ink.
(3)
5. Disconnect the Filter from the Tube by rotating the direction of the arrow.
Assembling
1. Prepare the assembly of the new Tube and the new Filter. Rotate the Joint by 30-40 degrees where you
insert. Hold the Tubes and Filters gently.
<Note> Do not twist or push in, otherwise the Joint may be damaged.
GT-3 Series 265

6. Replacing Parts
2. Mount the Tube Joint VRFE6 (3) with the Tube & Filter Assy made in step 1 in the previous page. Rotate
the Joint by 30-40 degrees where you insert.
(3)
3. Connect the Tube on the Print Head. Insert the Tube Connector (2) to the Tube; insert the Tube slowly
and straight to the Print Head (left figure). Confirm that the edge of the Tube can reach to the Print Head.
Rotate the Tube Connector (2) by 90 degrees (right figure) to fix the Tube.
(2)
(2)
4. Turn ON the Printer.

5. Load the ink to the replaced Tube. (Refer to “2-6-2. Introducing Ink”.)
6. Print Nozzle Check Pattern to confirm the print quality. (Refer to “2-6-3. Test Print”.)
266 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-36. Needles
Required Tools
 Wrench 10 (to unscrew Nut 8)
 Phillips screwdriver
 Needle-nose Pliers
 Plastic gloves
<Note>
Keep the inside of the Tubes free from dust in operation.
The ink may run out of the Tube; do not damage your cloth or table with dropped ink in operation. Connect the
joint to cover the Tube.
VRS206+VRFP6 VRFP6
The Needles are mounted as follows.

Needle + Needle Bracket + Washer Plain S 8 + Not 8 + Tube Clamp D3 (1)
(1)
<Note>
Do not remove the PCV cap (3) until you connect the Tube to keep the inside clean.
Do not remove the Needle-Tip Tube (4) until you insert the Filter Cartridge or Ink Cartridge.
Flange of the Needle (B)
(4)
(3)
GT-3 Series 267

6. Replacing Parts
Disassembling
1. Flush the ink of the Tube to be replaced.

The operation is different in Color side and the White side. Follow the steps below.
Color side (Black, Magenta, Cyan, Yellow)

(2) Remove the Ink Cartridge to be replaced and insert the Filter Cartridge.
(3) Select the menu [ Maintenance ] > [ Initial Cleaning ] and press the OK Button.
(4) Use the Up/Down Button to select [ Color ] and then press the OK Button.
(5) Use the Up/Down Button to select the color that the Needle is to be replaced and then press
the OK Button. Flushing starts.
(6) Turn OFF the printer when finished.
 Open the Front Cover UF to confirm if the ink inside the Tube is flushed.
 If the ink remains, close the Front Cover UF and execute the steps from (3) to (5) again.
White side (W1, W2, W3, W4)
(2) Remove the Ink Cartridge to be replaced and insert the Filter Cartridge W.
(3) Select the menu [ Maintenance ] > [ Load White ] and press the OK Button.
(4) Use the Up/Down Button to select the color that the Needle is to be replaced and then
press the OK Button. Flushing starts.
(5) Turn OFF the printer when finished.
 Open the Front Cover UF to confirm if the ink inside the Tube is flushed.
 If the ink remains, close the Front Cover UF and execute the steps (3) and (4) again.
2. Remove the Cover Cartridge. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling of the Covers”.)

The following procedure is for replacing Magenta Tube. Follow the process when you replace the Tubes
of other colors (Black, Cyan, Yellow, W1, W2, W3 and W4).
3. Put on the plastic gloves. Loosen the Tube Clamp D3 (1) that fixes the Needle and the Tube, and then
remove the Tube.
(1)
(5)
(6)
268 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
4. Remove the Filter Cartridge (7).
(7)
5. Hold the Needle from the back, as shown in the photos below. Remove the Nut 8 (5) and remove the
Washer Plain S 8 (6).
(5)
(6) (8)
<Note> Watch your fingers when you insert your hand to the Needle Bracket; the tip of the Needle is
really sharp and easy to get injured.
6. Slide back the Needle to the Ink Cartridge Holder and remove the Needle from the Needle Bracket (8).
(8)
GT-3 Series 269

6. Replacing Parts
Assembling
1. Insert the needle to align the bottom line (A) of the oval hole on the Cartridge Holder and the flange (B) of
the new Needle.
<Note> Be sure to put on the plastic gloves (1) when you hold the Needle tip.
(2)
(A)
(1)
(5) (B)
2. Hold the Needle to the Needle Bracket (2) from the back, mount the Washer Plain S 8 (3) and the Nut 8
(4) (refer to the reverse step in Dissembling step 5), and then fix by screwing the Nut 8 (4).
<Note> The tightening torque of the Nut 8 should be 1 N·m.
Reconfirmation
Confirm from the bottom side if the Needle should be fixed on the Needle Bracket with no space left.
(2) (5)
No space here
(4)
(3)
3. Remove the Needle-Tip Tube (5) and insert the Filter Cartridge (6).
(6)
270 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
4. Remove the PVC Cap (7) of the needle, insert the Tube Clamp D3 (8) into the Tube, and then insert the
Tube into the Needle. Apply some distilled water around the outside of the Tube to insert the Tube Clamp
smoothly.
<Note>
・Without distilled water, Tube may move round with Tube Clamp and it may kink.
・Do not put distilled water INSIDE the tube, the ink may be damaged.
(8)
(7)
(C)
5. Fix the Tube by screwing the Tube Clamp D3 (8), holding the Tubes softly as shown below.
<Note>
・If you feel the Tube can rotate together with the Tube Clamp, the tube may kink. Loosen the Tube
Clamp and apply some distilled water first.
・Insert the Tube and the Tube Clamp D3 until the edge will hit the Nut 8.
Until the touch the both edges
6. Remove the Filter Cartridge (6) and insert the Ink Cartridge (9).
(9)
(6)
GT-3 Series 271

6. Replacing Parts

8. Load the Ink inside the Tube that you have replaced the Needle. The process is different between the
Color Ink and the White Ink. Follow the process in “2-6-2. Installing Ink”. Prepare the Maintenance
Cartridge W and Maintenance Solution for White Ink.
9. Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to confirm the print quality. (Refer to “2-6-2. Test Print”)
272 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-37. Ink Retrieval Unit (GT-381/GT-361 only)

<Note>
Keep the inside of the Tubes free from dust in operation.
Protect the Tube Joint by connecting the Cap in the photo below.
VRSP6
1. Replacing the Ink Return Valve Assy

Get the necessary number of SB3100001 (Tube D3XL200 Supply) (1) in replacement.
The number of Tubes connected to Ink Return Valve Assy is different between GT-381 and GT-361: four sets
for GT-381 (W1, W2, W3 and W4) and two sets for GT-361 (only W1 and W2).
Reuse the Cap VCP-3 (2) for GT-361.
Tube D3XL200
GT-381 GT-361
Supply
Ｗ1
Ｗ2
Ｗ3 Ｗ1 Ｗ2
Ｗ4

2. Remove all the White Ink Cartridges and Insert the Filter Cartridges W for replacement.
3. Select the menu [ Maintenance ] > [ Load White ] and press the OK Button.
4. Use the Up/Down Button to select [ All Whites ] and then press the OK Button. Flushing starts.
Turn OFF the printer when finished.
・Open the Front Cover UF to confirm if the ink inside the Tube is flushed.
・If the ink remains, close the Front Cover UF and execute the steps (3) and (4) again.
GT-3 Series 273

6. Replacing Parts
Disassembling
Stop Lever
2. Remove the two Screws (3) and remove the Ink Return Valve Assy (4).
Remove the Tubes (5) connected to the Ink Return Valve Assy (4); four for GT-381, two for GT-361.
(4)
(3)
(5)
3. Rotate the tapped part (A) of the Tube Joint in Tube D3XL200 Supply (6) to the direction shown in the
arrow, and then remove it from the Joint VRFT6 (7); four for GT-381, two for GT-361.
(6)
(A)
(7)
274 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
Assembling
1. Fit the Positioning Boss (2) of the new Ink Return Valve Assy (1) to the Positioning Hole (3) and fix it with
the two Screws (4).
(3)
(4)
(2) (1)
2. Mount the new Tube D3XL200 Supply (5). Insert the tapped part (A) of the Tube Joint into the Tube
D3XL200 Supply (6) and fix it by rotating the Joint to the direction shown in the arrow, by 30-45 degrees.
Four for GT-381, two for GT-361.
(5)
(A)
(6)
GT-3 Series 275

6. Replacing Parts
3. Connect the new Tube D3XL200 Supply to the Ink Return Valve Assy as shown in the photos below.
<Note>
Insert the Tubes at least 7.5mm or more from the edge of the Joint on the Ink Return Valve Assy.
GT-381 Tube D3XL200

GT-361
Supply
(2)
Ｗ1
Ｗ2
Ｗ3 Ｗ1 Ｗ2
Ｗ4
7.5mm or more
GT-381 GT-361
Ｗ2 Ｗ2
Ｗ4
Cap VCP-3
Ｗ3
Ｗ1 Ｗ1
4. Push the Stop Lever to release the lock and close the Front Cover UF with both hands.
5. Load the Ink inside the Tubes. Prepare the Maintenance Cartridge W and Maintenance Solution for
White Ink and follow the process in “2-6-2. Installing Ink”.
6. Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to confirm the print quality. (Refer to “2-6-2. Test Print”)
276 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
2. Replacing the Solenoid Ink Return Assy

2. Go to the Advanced menu, and select [ Output Check ] > [ Cap Test ] > [ Cap Down ] and press the OK
Button.
Turn OFF the printer after the Caps on the Maintenance Unit are down.
<Note>
Caps move UP when you press the Return Button or Stop Button after you turn OFF the printer.

Stop Lever
5. Move the Carriage to the position where the Print Heads are located over the Flushing Plate slowly by
hand.
(1)
6. Disconnect the Connector (2).

Remove the two Bolt Sockets (3) and dismount the Solenoid Ink Return Assy (4).
(4)
(2)
(3)
7. Mount the new Solenoid Ink Return Assy in the reverse process of step 6 above.
8. Push the Stop Lever to release the lock and close the Front Cover UF with both hands.
GT-3 Series 277

6. Replacing Parts
3. Disassembling / assembling of the Solenoid Ink Return Assy
5
7
4
8
6
1. Remove the Screw (1) and remove the Cord Holder:HK-3N (2).
2. Remove the two Screws (3) and dismount the GT3 Solenoid W_Ret Assy (4).
3. Remove the one Retaining Ring E4 (5), pull out the Return Valve Pin (6) and then dismount the Solenoid
Valve Lever (7) with the Plunger of the GT3 Solenoid W_Ret Assy (4).
4. Pull out the Pin Spring Roll AW3 (8) and disassemble the Plunger of the GT3 Solenoid W_Ret Assy (4)
and the Solenoid Valve Lever (7).
5. Assemble in the reverse steps of 1-4 in the above.
<Note>
The groove (A) on the Pin Spring Roll AW3 (8) should be horizontal as shown in the figure below when
you assemble the Plunger of the GT3 Solenoid W_Ret Assy (4) and the Solenoid Valve Lever (7).
(7)
(4)
(A)
278 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-38. Print Heads
Required Tools
 Wrist Strap
Replace the Filter before replacing the Print Head when you find a large number of missing nozzles in
printing; the print is getting lost in printing Solid test pattern and there may be clogged ink covering the F/E
Filter inside the Print Head (see “4-1-2. Heavy misfiring in printing (Checking the Cracks in the Tube”). Refer
to the “6-1-33. Replacing the Filter over the Print Head”.
<Important!>
・ Print Heads are delicate and easy to damage, please handle with care.
・ Do not mount/dismount the Print Heads on the Maintenance Unit; the surface of the Print Heads will
hit the edge of Wiper Cleaner and may cause serious damage. Select the menu from the Operation
Panel or move the Carriage over the Flushing Plate (1) by hand.
・ Be sure to remove the Wiper Cleaners (2) and lower the Caps (3) beforehand if you have to operate
on the Maintenance Unit.
CMYK Print Head

1. Turn off the printer and open the Front Cover with both hands until it is locked with the stopper.
2. Open the new Print Head. Put the gloves on your hands not to touch the electronic parts and remove the
fitting and the cover. The fitting (A) on the Print Head (see the arrow below) will be used during operation.
(A)
GT-3 Series 279

6. Replacing Parts
3. Rotate the Tube Connector (1) (the white part over the Print Head) by 90 degrees (left photo), lift it
straight up slowly and remove the Tube from the Print Head (right photo), and insert the Fitting that you
removed in the step 2 of the previous page. Do not force to pull out the Tube from the Print Head, or the
junction may be damaged. Rotate the Tube little by little and move it straight up slowly.
(1)
(2)
6. Select [Head Cleaning] > [Powerful Cleaning] from the menu and execute 3 times to remove the ink
inside the Print Head before you remove it.
<Note>
Pay attention to the dropped ink when you pack and send the Print Head in the box.
7. Select [Maintenance] > [Head Replacement] of the menu and press the OK Button.
8. The Carriage moves to the position of the Flushing Plate. Follow the indication of the Display and turn
OFF the printer.
10. Take off the gloves and touch some metallic part to dissipate static electricity (e.g. Covers). Better to put
on the Wrist Strap.
11. Remove the plastic cover on the Carriage PCB. Disconnect the white cable (left) and remove the four
claws on the both edges (right).
280 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
12. Remove the silicone tubes that are attached the screws under the Carriage PCB (left), and remove the
holes of the cover (right), and remove the plastic cover.
13. Pull out the black tabs at the both edges of Flat Cable of the Print Head to the front side of the printer,
and remove the Flat Cable (the following example: Black).
14. Rotate the Lever (3) to your side that fixes the Print Head. Move it to your side.
(3)
GT-3 Series 281

6. Replacing Parts
15. Lean the Print Head backward to the inside of the Carriage (left), hold the Knob and pull up the Print
Head and remove it from the printer (right). Keep the surface of the Print Head (Nozzles) safe, do not
touch to other parts or the Print Head may be seriously damaged.
16. Mount the new Print Head on the printer. Fit the V-shaped groove (4) to the Positioning Pin (5) (right).
Nozzle
Surface (4) (5)
17. Hold the knob (6) of the Print Head (left) and push it downward so that the V-shaped groove can fit the
Positioning Pin (5). Push down the Print Head to fix the corner of the Print Head by the Flat Spring (7)
(right).
(5) (7)
(6)
6
Slide the Print Head into the Flat

5
(5) Spring from the right to the left.
(7)
7
282 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
18. Rotate the Lever to fix the Print Head.

19. Remove the protection film.
20. Remove the Fitting that inserted in the step 3, connect the Tube to the Print Head and fix the Tube by
rotating the Tube Connector by 90 degrees.
21. Take off the gloves and connect the Flat Cable to the Carriage PCB. Put the Flat Cable with the terminal
(metal) side on the top (left), insert straight into the connector and fix it by pushing the tabs of both sides
(right).
<Important!>
Do not insert the Flat Cable at an angle. The electric current may not be stable and increase the
Print Head temperature, which causes machine errors, mis-firing, and give serious damage to the
Print Head. Do not repeat the insertion, or the terminal (metal) may be damaged and cause
serious mis-firing.
22. Mount the Plastic Cover over the Carriage PCB. Put it on the Carriage PCB in curl (left), and make the
Condenser (big black part on the Carriage PCB) go through the hole of the Plastic Cover (right).
23. Put the Plastic Cover so that the fold at the back should cover the metal plate under the Carriage PCB.
GT-3 Series 283

6. Replacing Parts
24. Put the two screws through the holes on the front side of the Plastic Cover (left), and apply the silicone
tubes to the screws (8) that were removed in the step 13.
(8)
25. Put the claws on the Plastic Cover that were removed in the step 12 (left), and connect the Harness.
28. Select [ Maintenance ] > [ Initial Cleaning ] from the menu and load the ink.
29. Execute the Normal Cleaning for all the Print Heads so that the surface of the Print Head may be dried.
30. Print Nozzle Check Pattern to confirm if the replaced Print Head works OK. (See "2-6-3. Test Print”. )
31. Print the Standard Check Pattern to check the alignment if the Print Head is placed properly.
<Note>
If the Print Heads do not align properly, the printer cannot make correct r colors. See the example below:
Cyan Print Head does not align (shifted forward). Check step 15 and 16 in former page
Cyan moves up and Yellow and Magenta

seems to move down.
32. If the quality is OK go on to the next section "2-6-5. Firing Adjustment of the Print Heads" and “2-6-6.
Aligning the Print Position of White / Color Print Heads” to complete the adjustment after the Print Head
replacement. If you still see the problem in print quality, troubleshoot to improve the print quality.
284 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
White Print Head:
<Important!>
White Print Heads are in the

backside, the opposite side of CMYK
Print Heads, confirm the operation by
looking form the left side of the
printer. Pay attention to the surface
of the Print Head (Nozzles) not to hit
the other parts in removing /
mounting or the Print Head may be
seriously damaged.
0083Y
1. Turn off the printer and open the Front Cover with both hands until it is locked with the stopper.
2. Open the new Print Head. Put the gloves on your hands not to touch the electronic parts and remove the
fitting and the cover. The fitting (A) on the Print Head (see the arrow below) will be used during operation.
(A)
3. Rotate the Tube Connector (1) (the white part over the Print Head) by 90 degrees (left photo), lift it
straight up slowly and remove the Tube from the Print Head (right photo), and insert the Fitting that you
removed in the step 2 of the above. Do not force to pull out the Tube from the Print Head, or the junction
may be damaged. Rotate the Tube little by little and move it straight up slowly.
(1) (2)
6. Select [Head Cleaning] > [Powerful Cleaning] from the menu and execute 3 times to remove the ink
inside the Print Head before you remove it.
<Note>
Pay attention to the dropped ink when you pack and send the Print Head in the box.
7. Select [Maintenance] > [Head Replacement] of the menu and press the OK Button.
GT-3 Series 285

6. Replacing Parts
8. The Carriage moves to the position of the Flushing Plate. Follow the indication of the Display and turn
OFF the printer.
10. Take off the gloves and touch some metallic part to dissipate static electricity (e.g. Covers). Better to put
on the Wrist Strap.
11. Remove the plastic cover on the Carriage PCB by referring to the step 11 and 12 in the page for Color.
12. Pull out the black tabs at the both edges of Flat Cable of the Print Head to the back side of the printer,
and remove the Flat Cable (the following example:W2).
13. Rotate the Lever (3) to your side that fixes the Print Head. Move it to the direction of the arrow.
(3)
14. Lean the Print Head backward to the inside of the Carriage (left), hold the Knob and pull up the Print
Head and remove it from the printer (right). Keep the surface of the Print Head (Nozzles) safe, do not
touch to other parts or the Print Head may be seriously damaged.
15. Mount the new Print Head on the printer. Hold the knob (6) of the Print Head (left), protect the Tube with
the other hand (middle), and then locate the Print Head to the mounted position (right). Fix the print head
by referring to the step 16, 17 and 18 in the page for Color.
<Note>
Move the Print Head by its upper part go through the Tube. It is easier to fix the Print Head on the
Carriage by leaning the Print Head backward and moving it from the upper left. Do not hit the surface of
the Print Head to the other parts or it may be seriously damaged.
Do not break or bend the Tubes.
286 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
16. Rotate the Lever to fix the Print Head when you fix it as shown below.
17. Following the steps 19 to 25 in Color Print Head operations to remove the protection film of the Print
Head, connect the Flat Cable to the Carriage PCB and cover the Carriage PCB with the Plastic Cover.
<Important>
Do not insert the Flat Cable at an angle. The electric current may not be stable and increase the
Print Head temperature, which causes machine errors, mis-firing, and give serious damage to the
Print Head. Do not repeat the insertion, or the terminal (metal) may be damaged and cause
serious mis-firing.
20. Select [ Maintenance ] > [ Load White ] from the menu and select the Print Head. The White Ink will start
loading.
21. Execute the Normal Cleaning for all the Print Heads so that the surface of the Print Head may be dried.
22. Print Nozzle Check Pattern to confirm if the replaced Print Head works OK. (See "2-6-3. Test Print”. )
23. Print the Standard Check Pattern to check the alignment if the Print Head is placed properly. If the Print
Heads are not aligned, then you can see the white ink printed around the color print because the white
print area should be printed wider than the color area. Confirm the position of four (GT-381) or two
(GT-361) White Print Heads.
If not aligned, the white print should be

printed wider than the original print data.
(The sample is printed by CMYK ink.)
24. If the quality is OK go on to the next section "2-6-5. Firing Adjustment of the Print Heads" and “2-6-6.
Aligning the Print Position of White / Color Print Heads” to complete the adjustment after the Print Head
replacement. If you still see the problem in print quality, troubleshoot to improve the print quality.
GT-3 Series 287

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-39. FFC on Print Head
Required Tools
 Wrist Strap
Touch the metal area before you operate. Use the Wrist Strap.
1. Remove the screw on the top.
2. Remove the plastic cover.

(1) Pull out the side of the Plastic Cover from the space under the Print Head knob.
(2) Pull out the top of the Plastic Cover between the PCB and the metal plate.
288 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
(3) Remove the Plastic Cover by pulling out the FFC from the Slit.
3. Unlock the lock of the FFC Connector and remove the FFC.
4. Crease the new FFC; mark the position of 15 mm from the edge of the FFC and fold it.
GT-3 Series 289

6. Replacing Parts
5. Insert the FFC into the FFC Connector and lock it.
Confirm the direction of the FFC. Follow

this photo.
Insert the FFC directly into the connector.

If it tilts, it may cause severe damage. Push the locks at both edges to lock the FFC.
<Important>
・Never make the Flat Cable tilt when you connect; The electrical current may not be stable, which
may cause Head Temp High errors and missing nozzles, or even give serious damage to the Print
Head. The metal part may be damaged by inserting over again.
・Do not put water around the connectors and metal parts; they may short-circuit and give serious
damage to the PCBs.
6. Mount the Cover on the Print Head.

(1) Insert the FFC into the slit of the Plastic Cover.
(2) Pass the edge of the Plastic Cover between the Heat Sink and the PCB.
290 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
(3) Pass the Plastic Cover between the PCB and the metal plate.
(2)
(3)
(1)
(4) Insert the convex part (4) of the Plastic Cover into the hole (5) on the Damper Case.
(4)
(5)
(5) Insert the side of the Plastic Cover into the bottom of the Print Head Knob.
7. Tighten the screw on the top of the Print Head.
GT-3 Series 291

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-40. Waste Ink Units

Required Tool
・Open ended spanner: M3 (5.5 mm)
Disassembling
1. Dismount the Maintenance Unit. (Refer to “6-1-16. Assembling/Disassembling of the Maintenance Unit”.)
2. Remove the two screws (1) in the left/right, fixing the Pump Holder.
(1)
(1)
3. Pull out the Pump Tube (3) and the Joint (4) from the Waste Ink Joint (2) and remove the screw (5).
(5)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(5)
4. Move down the Maintenance Unit and disconnect the Maintenance Middle Tube 2 (6) from the Waste Ink
Joint (2).
(2)
(6)
292 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
5. Disconnect the Waste Ink Tube 1 (8) from the Cord Clamp 13-L (7).
(7)
(8)
6. Disconnect the Waste Ink Tube 1 (8) from the Ink Tray (9).
(8)
(9)
7. Remove the four screws (10) and remove the Cap Felt (11).
(11)
(10)
GT-3 Series 293

6. Replacing Parts
8. Remove the two screws (12).
(12)
9. Lift up the CL Guide Lower (13) and remove the Ink Tray (9).
(13)
(9)
(13)
(9)
294 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
Assembling
1. Mount the Spacer M3-30 (2) on the new Ink Tray (1), with tightening torque 0.5 N·m.
(2)
(1)
2. Lift up the CL Guide Lower (3) and hold the Ink Tray (1) in the middle of the four Cap Tubes (4).
(3)
(1)
(3)
(4)
(1)
GT-3 Series 295

6. Replacing Parts
3. Hold the Spacer M3-30 with the Open ended spanner: M3 (5.5 mm), and fix it with the four screws (5)
with tightening torque 0.8 N·m.
(5)
4. Tighten the two screws (6) with tightening torque 0.5 N·m, and mount the Cap Felt (7) facing to the bent
portion of the CL Guide Lower (position A).
(7)
(6)
(A)
5. Fix the Waste Ink Tube 1 (8) to the Ink Tray (1) with the Band (9) to the end, less than 1 mm margin from
the root.
(9)
(8)
(1)
296 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6. Pass the Waste Ink Tube 1 (8) through the Cord Clamp 13-L (10).
(10)
(8)
7. Insert the Maintenance Middle Tube 2 (12) into the Waste Ink Joint (11) until the Maintenance Middle
Tube 2 can reach to the end, less than 1 mm margin from the root.
(11)
(12)
8. Fix the Waste Ink Joint (11) on the Pump Holder (13) with the screw (14), with tightening torque 0.5 N·m,
and insert the Pump Tube (15) and the Joint (16) until to the end, less than 1 mm margin from the root.
(15) (14)
(16)
(14) (11)
(13)
GT-3 Series 297

6. Replacing Parts
9. Pass the Pump Tube (15) through the notched groove (B).
(15)
(B)
(15)
10. Mount the Pump Holder on the Frame and fix it with the right/left screws (17), with tightening torque 1.5
N·m.
(17)
(17)
11. Mount the Maintenance Unit on the printer. (Refer to “6-1-16. Assembling/Disassembling of the
Maintenance Unit”.)
298 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-41. Exhaust Fan

Required Tool
・ Phillips screwdriver M4
・ Gloves
Disassembling
2. Move the Platen at the backmost position with the Platen Button on the Operation Panel.

4. Open the Front Cover UF with both hands until it is locked with the stopper.
Stop Lever
0046Y
5. Remove the Cover DR. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling of the Covers”.)
6. Put the gloves on your both hands, and put your left hand from the space before the Timing Belt to reach
the Filter Cover. Lift up the Lock (1) of the Filter Cover by removing the Guide Holes from the projections.
(1)
0068Y
<Note>
Pay attention not to hit the Filter Cover to the Timing Belt.
GT-3 Series 299

6. Replacing Parts
7. Disconnect the Connector (2) of the DC Fan Motor, and remove the Harness from the two Cord Clamps
LWS4NS (3).
(3)
(2)
(2)
8. Remove the four Screws (4) and remove the Fan Guard (5) and the DC Fan Motor (6).
<Note>
Operate with the Gloves on, because the Fan Guard may be covered with Ink mist.
(6)
(5)
(4)
Assembling
1. Mount the new DC Fan Motor (1) in the reverse process in Disassembling step 8 above. Pay attention to
the direction of the Harness from the DC Fan Motor (A), and the position of the projections (B) of the Fan
Guard.
(1)
(A)
(B)
2. Connect the Connector of the DC Fan Motor, and connect the Harness from the two Cord Clamps
LWS4NS (3) in the reverse process in Disassembling step 7 above.
3. Mount the Cover DR in the reverse process in Disassembling step 5 above.
4. Mount the Filter Cover in the reverse process in Disassembling step 6 above.
5. Push the Stop Lever to release the lock when you close the Front Cover UF with both hands.
300 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-42. Removing the Needle Felt

GT-3 has stopped mounting the Needle Felts since K2994330 because the stuck ink around the Needle may
give damage to the spout on the Ink Cartridge. Remove the Needle Felts if the severe misfiring occurs in the
unit before K2994329.
There are two ways to remove the Needle Felts.

Process 1 is to remove the ink and Felts with the Needle Bracket dismounted (recommended).
Process 2 is to execute with the Needle Bracket mounted. For those who is not used to the machine
maintenance, e.g. Tubes, Needles and other mechanical operations, or some situation that you cannot have
space to dismount the Needle Bracket.
Required Tool
・ Phillips screwdriver Plus: M3, M4
・ Stubby screwdriver Plus (less than 7 cm): M4
・ Tweezers (see right photo)
・ Scissors (see right photo)
・ Plastic gloves
・ Paper or cloth with less dust
・ Mirror
<Note>
・ Be sure to turn OFF the printer and disconnect the AC cord.
・ Take care not to bend or crush the Tubes; they are very fragile, especially a new Tube. Handle with care
and keep the minimum bending radius by 50 mm or more.
・ Replace to a new Tube if bent or damaged.
・ Operate as quickly as you can; Ink may be dried and may give damage to the print quality.
・ Be sure to operate with gloves on.
Process 1
1. Remove the Cover Cartridge. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/ Disassembling of the Covers”.)
Loosen the one Screw (1) at the bottom of the Cover Cartridge.
Remove the two Screws (2) in the front of the Cartridge Front Cover.
(2)
(1)
2. Remove the two Screws (3) on the top of the Cover Cartridge.
Pull out the Cover Cartridge in the direction of the arrow (right photo). Pay attention not to give damage
to the Tubes in operation.
Keep the Cartridge Cover on the safe and flat place.
(3)
GT-3 Series 301

6. Replacing Parts
3. The Needle Bracket is set as shown in the right photo; cover the top of the Cartridge Base (5), the floor
and the table with some paper or cloth (6) as shown in the left photo.
(6)
(5)
(4)
(6)
4. Pull out all the Ink Cartridges to your side by approx. 5 cm.
5. Remove the two Screws (7) and remove the two Clamps, NK-18N (8)
<Note>
The recent productions have neither Screws (7) nor Clamps, NK-18N (8) mounted.
(7) (7)
(8) (8)
6. Remove the four Screws (9) and make the two Tube Holder Fixes (10) movable.
Keep mounting the Tubes on the Tube Holder Fixes.
(9) (9)
(10) (10)
302 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
7. Remove the three Screws (11), dismount the Needle Bracket (4) with the Needles on, and put it on the
paper/cloth of the Cartridge Base (5) as shown in the right photo.
(6)
(11) (4)
(5)
<Note>
・ Pay attention not to fold, crush the Tubes in operation.
・ Do not make Needles downward, or the ink may come out from the Needles naturally. Pay attention
in putting it on or moving. Ink may drop on Ink Cartridges, the table and the floor.
8. Remove all the Needle Felts from the Needles by following the steps 1) to 4).
1) Take the edge of the Needle Felt with Tweezers (photo A).
2) Add a cut (a) with scissors on the Felt (photo B and C).
3) Pluck all the Needle Felt with Tweezers (photo D).
<Note>
Do not pull out the Needle Felt (12) from the tip (b) of the Needle; the small fiber may go into the Needle
and give damage to the Print Head.
(12)
(b)
A B
(a)
C D
GT-3 Series 303

6. Replacing Parts
4) Remove those remained ink (c) and the double-sided adhesive tape (d) as shown in the photo
E with the Clean Stick (e) with Maintenance Solution applied (see photo F) to make them clean
as shown in the photo G.
(c)
(d) (e)
E F G
9. Mount the Needle Bracket on the Cartridge Base, with clean Needles on.
Confirm the screwing order of the three Screws:
1) Fix the Screw (13) Temporarily.
2) Tighten the Screw (14).
3) Tighten the Screw (13).
4) Tighten the Screw (15) in the center.
(13) (14)
(13)
(15)
10. Mount the two Tube Holder Fix (2) and the two Clamps, NK-18N in the reverse process of the step 4-5.
<Note>
 The recent productions have neither those Screws nor Clamps, NK-18N mounted.
 Pay very much attention to the Tubes in the position (f) as shown in the photos below.
(f)
(f)
304 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
11. Agitate the White Ink Cartridge (see the following instructions) and insert all the Ink Cartridges to the
Cartridge Base.
<Note>
Pigments in the White Ink are sinking little by little all the time. Hold the cartridge with both hands, upside
down from the mounted position, and shake it in 1-2 minutes so that the pigments inside can be mixed
enough. Do it one by one.
0054Y
12. Mount the Cover Cartridge in the reverse step of 1 in Process 1.
13. Load the Ink into the Tubes.
Turn ON the printer. Confirm the initialization, with no errors indicated.
Load the ink by referring to “2-6-2. Introducing Ink”.
14. Print Nozzle Check Pattern to confirm the print quality. (Refer to “2-6-3. Test Print”.)
Process 2
1. Remove the Cover Cartridge. Follow the operation in Process 1.
2. Cover the top of the Cartridge Base (5), the floor and the table with some paper or cloth (6) as shown in
the left photo.
(1)
3. Pull out the Ink Cartridges to your side that you are going to operate by approx. 5 cm.
Remove the Ink Cartridges of the both sides in the same way if the operation is not easy.
GT-3 Series 305

6. Replacing Parts
4. Remove all the Needle Felts (2) one by one from the Needles.
1) Take the edge of the Needle Felt with Tweezers (photo A).
2) Add a cut (a) with scissors on the Felt (photo B and C).
3) Pluck all the Needle Felt with Tweezers (photo D).
<Note>
Do not pull out the Needle Felt (12) from the tip of the Needle; the small fiber may go into the Needle and
give damage to the Print Head.
(2)
(a)
C
A B
4) Remove those remained ink (b) and the double-sided adhesive tape (c) as shown in the photo
D with the Clean Stick (d) with Maintenance Solution applied (see photo E) to make them clean
as shown in the photo F.
<Note>
Use the Mirror to confirm if the Needle should be clean.
(b)
(c)
D (d) E F
5. Confirm if all the Needles are clean with no Needle Felts remained, then agitate the White Ink Cartridges
and load the Ink inside the Tubes. Follow the steps 11-14 in the Process 1.
306 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-1-43. Felts on Cartridge Base

Required Tool
 Phillips screwdriver Plus
 Stubby screwdriver Plus (7 cm or shorter)
 Plustic gloves
 Paper or cloth with less dust
Replace the Felts when you give some operation to the Cartridge Base and find they are very dirty.
<Note>
There are two types of Cartridge Base (1), with round holes / U grooves, two types of Felts (2), round and
square),and there are three ways to apply those felts in pattern 1 to 3.
Cartridge Base (Round holes) Cartridge Base (U grooves)
(1) (1)
Y,C,M,K W4,W3,W2,W1
Y,C,M,K W4,W3,W2,W1
(2) (2) (2)

Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3
(2) (2)
Pattern 2 for GT-341 Pattern 3 for GT-341
The supply part Felt (2) is square.

・Apply two Felts on GT-381 and GT-361; one for Color side, the other for White side.
・Apply one Felts on GT-341 for Color side.
Pattern 1 for GT-341: Cartridge Base (round holes)

Remove all the eight round Felts (2) with dirty ink.
Apply the new square Felt (2) as shown in the right photo. (1)
(2)
Pattern 1 forGT-341
GT-3 Series 307

6. Replacing Parts
Procedure
1. Remove the Cover Cartridge. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/ Disassembling of the Covers”.)
2. Cover the floor and the table with some paper or cloth (1) as shown in the left photo.
(1)
Paper or cloth
3. Remove the dirty Felts (2) from the Cartridge Base (1).
In Pattern 1, remove all the eight round Felts (2) from the Cartridge Base (1).
<Note>
Those Felts (2) are applied with the double-sided adhesive tape. Remove with no glue left on the Cartrige
Base (1). Clean the dirty ink or glue with alcohol.
Mount the new Felts (2) on the position shown in the photo.
(2) (2)
Cartridge Base (1): Round holes: 5mm
5mm
Confirm the photo in the right. Fix the both
top-bottom edges of the new Felt (2) with the Mark
double-sided tape at the bottom of the φ20
holes on the Cartridge Base (1). Cover the
holes with the Felt (2) with 5 mm margins at
20 mm wide
right-left ends.
Double-sided tape
Better to put 3 marks on the Cartridge Base (1) Mark Φ20 hole
Mark
first and then align the edges of the Felts (2) to
those marks. Top position of the tape (1)
(1) (2) (2)

Cartridge Base (1): U-notch type: 5mm 5mm
Confirm the photo in the right. Fix the both
top-bottom edges of the new Felt (2) with the Mark
double-sided tape at the bottom of the
U-notches on the Cartridge Base (1). Fix the
20 mm wide
Felt (2) with 5 mm margins at right-left ends.
Double-sided tape
Better to put 3 marks on the Cartridge Base (1)

first and then align the edges of the Felts (2) to Mark Mark
those marks.
Top position of the tape
4. Mount the Cover Cartridge. (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/ Disassembling of the Covers”.)
308 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-2. Replacing the Electrical Parts

6-2-1. Precautions in Adjustment
Pay attention to the followings when opening the Control Box for maintenance or inspection.
Electric shock:
Large capacitors tend to retain high voltage for up to 5 minutes after turning OFF the power, and therefore the
following operations must be done at least 5 minutes after turning OFF the power.
 Opening/closing the control box
 Inserting/removing connectors
 Measuring resistance
 Other operations that involve touching anything inside the control box
Some inspections require measuring the voltage while the power is turned ON with the control box open.
In such cases, take care never to touch anywhere except the measurement locations. Furthermore, always
keep in mind that high voltage remains for approximately 5 minutes after turning OFF the power.
Injury
Take care not to cut fingers on metal parts such as heat sinks or covers when inserting and removing
connectors or measuring.
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING
TO THE INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING
GT-3 Series 309

6. Replacing Parts
6-2-2. Control Box, Operation Panel, PCBs
2
7
3
4
1. Main PCB
Located inside of the Control Box to control printer operation.
2. Power PCB
Located inside of the Control Box to supply power to the whole printer.
3. Surge Absorber PCB

Decreases the power line noise.
4. Panel PCB / LCD Unit / USB Host PCB

Located in the Operation Panel to control the display and input operation.
5. Maintenance PCB
Located at the rear of the Maintenance Unit to control the maintenance operation.
6. Carriage PCB
Located on the top of the Carriage Assy on which the Print Heads are mounted, to control ink firing for
maximum 8 print heads by each.
7. Ink Sensor PCB, Ink Switch PCB

Located at the back of the Ink Cartridge to detect the Cartridge and the amount of ink remained.
310 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-2-3. Motors, Solenoids, Sensors and Switches
5
2
3
6
7 9
10 11
1. Platen Motor
Located in the printer to move the Platen back and forth.
2. Carriage Motor
Located in the printer to move the Carriage left and right where the Print Heads are mounted.
3. White Ink Return Solenoid
Located in the printer to retrieve the White Ink inside the tubes back to the Ink Cartridge.
4. Print Switch
Located on the Operation Panel. It flashes while the print data is being received, and is ON when the
print data is ready to print.
5. Cover Open Switch
Located on the right side of the printer. It turns OFF the power for safety when the Cover UF is opened.
6. Flap Solenoid
Located in the printer to move the Sensor Flap.
7. Flap Sensor
Located in the printer to activate when the Sensor Flap is obstructed.
8. Power Switch
Located at the bottom of the Operation Panel to turn the power ON/OFF.
9. AC Inlet
Located at the back of the printer to plug AC Cord into the inlet.
10. Platen Origin Sensor
Located in the printer to detect the origin of the Platen.
11. Exhaust Fan
Located in the printer to exhaust the mist.
GT-3 Series 311

6. Replacing Parts
Inside the Maintenance Unit

4
6
2
Front
1
5
7 3
1. Cap Motor
Located in the front to raise and lower the Cap mechanism.
2. Wiper Motor
Located in the center to move the Wiper mechanism back and forth.
3. Pump Motor
Located in the back to operate the Tube Pump mechanism for Head Cleaning.
4. Wiper Cleaner Cassette Switches

Located in the front and the center, to detect the Wiper Cleaner Cassette.
5. Cap Origin Sensor

Located on the left side to detect the origin of the Cap mechanism.
6. Wiper Origin Sensor

Located in the upper right center to detect the origin of the Wiper mechanism.
7. Pump Rotation Sensor

Located at the back to detect the rotation of the Tube Pump.
8. Maintenance Solenoid Unit (Black, Magenta, Cyan, Yellow, White 1-4)

Located in the middle. This unit is normally closed and opened when the pump takes in the waste ink.
9. GT3 Solenoid Vent Assy

Located at the lower right back. This unit is normally closed and opened when the pump takes in the
waste ink.
312 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-2-4. Control Box Assy
(A)
3
6
The following parts and units are located in the Control Box.
1. Main PCB Assy
2. Power Supply Unit

Located under the Power Cover (A).
3. Surge Absorber PCB Assy

4. Speaker
5. Noise Filter
6. Primary Fuse
7. Secondary Fuse
GT-3 Series 313

6. Replacing Parts
6-2-5. Connectors
Any troubles can occur if connectors are not properly connected.
Before starting your troubleshooting, be sure that there is no contact failure between pins and wires, and that
all connectors have been properly inserted.
<Note>
Take care to avoid soiling the contacts (metallic surface) of the FFCs (Flexible Flat Cables) for Carriage
signals, Print Head Power Supply unit, Panels and other parts with ink or grease.
Furthermore, avoid touching the FFC contacts with bare hands. Circuits may not function if FFC contacts are
soiled.
6-2-6. Connector Locations

Main PCB
CN1 CN3 CN4 CN9 CN11 CN12 CN14 CN15

DC_IN MNT PT_MOT HEAD_PW SPEAK CR_CTRL PT_ORG USB_H
CN23
USB_F
CN6 CN5 CN7 CN8 CN10 CN17 CN22

JAM&CR_MOT PNL_PW EX_IN EX_OUT H_MEN PNL ETHER_1
Panel PCB
CN4
CN3 BACK LIGHT (backside)
CN2 PRINT SW (backside) CN1 MAIN (backside)
314 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
LCD Unit & USB PCB

LCD Unit USB PCB
CN1
FPC
LCD
CN2
BACK
LIGHT
Power Supply Unit
CN2
CN1
Surge Absorber PCB Assy
GT-3 Series 315

6. Replacing Parts
Maintenance PCB Assy
CN1 CAP MOTOR CN2, 3

ORG SENS
CN5 MAIN PCB
CN7
PUMP MOTOR
CN9
WIPE MOTOR
CN10 VALVE CN12 SENS
Carriage PCB Assy
CN1 WHITE1 CN2 WHITE2 CN3 WHITE3
CN4 WHITE4
CN6
CN5
CN8 HEAD
POWER
CN12
YELLOW
CN9 BLACK CN10 MAGENTA CN11 CYAN
316 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
Encoder PCB Assy
CN1
Ink Sensor PCB Assy
CN101 INC SENS
Ink Switch PCB Assy
CN1 MNT
CN4 M SENS
CN2 Y SENS CN5 K SENS

CN6 W4 CN7 W3 CN8 W2 CN9 W1
CN3 C SENS
SENS SENS SENS SENS
GT-3 Series 317

6. Replacing Parts
6-2-7. Main PCB Assy

Adjust the firmware with GT-3 Service Tool, after you replace to the new Main PCB Assy. (Refer to “3-3. GT-3
Service Tool”.) Refer to the page “How to connect/disconnect the FFC Connector” in “6-2-18. Carriage PCB
Assy” when you handle FFC Connectors.
Required Tools
・ Thermistor
Disassembling
1. Remove the AC Cord (1).
(1)
2. Remove the Cover DR (right side). (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling of the Covers”.)
3. Remove the Harness: Panel Com (3) with the Ferrite Core (2) together from the Cord Clamp (4).
Main PCB Assy
(2)
(3)
318 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
4. Remove all the cables that connect to the Main PCB (5).
CN3 CN4 (6)
CN14
(5)
CN11
CN1 CN9 CN12
CN15
CN6
CN10
CN7
CN8
How to connect/disconnect CN9, 12 Connectors

Remove the FFC (6) by pulling the “black plastic claws” at the same time, and then the lock is unlocked.
Connect the FFC by inserting the FFC first and then

pushing the “black plastic claws” together to lock.
<Note>
・ Never make the contact area (metal) damaged or
wasted with grease.
・ Do not touch the contact area (metal) with your fingers.
(6)
GT-3 Series 319

6. Replacing Parts
5. Remove the six screws (7) that fix the Main PCB Assy (5). Remove the one screw (9) for USB Function
Connector (8) at the back of the printer. Disconnect if any cable is connected. Disconnect the LAN Cable
if connected to the Connector (10).
(8)
(9)
(7)
(10)
6. Make the Main PCB Assy (5) slide to the left until the LAN Connector (10) is out of the Control Box.
Rotate the right side of the Main PCB Assy to your side with your left hand and remove it from the Control
Box.
(5)
(5)
(10)
(10)
320 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
<Note>
The LAN initial settings may not be properly assigned in the supply Main PCB; the firmware version is former
than 2.10 in the production process. Because of the undefined settings, the error 4501 may occur when you
replace the Main PCB and upgrade the firmware to the current version. Assign proper IP address when the
customer uses LAN connection. If the customer does not use LAN connection, follow the troubleshooting
below; input the “0” to all.
1 Execute GT-3 Maintenance in [Brother GT-3 Tools] and select [ IP Address Assignment ].
2 Assign all the settings as shown below and select [ Next ] to finish the assignment.
GT-3 Series 321

6. Replacing Parts
6-2-8. EMC Filter

Disassembling
2. Remove the all five Faston Terminals (2) that connect to the EMC Filter (1).
Remove the two screws (3) that fix the EMC Filter.
(2)
(3) (3)
(2)
3. Follow the reverse steps in reassembling.
6-2-9. Speaker
Disassembling
2. Remove the Connector (1) that connects to the Speaker.
3. Loosen the two screws (3) that fix the Speaker Holder (2) and remove the Speaker (4).
(1)
(3)
(3)
(4)
(2)
322 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-2-10. Power Unit

Disassembling
1. Remove the AC Cord and remove the Cover DR (right side). (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling
of the Covers”.)
2. Remove the Ferrite Core from the Cord Clamp. (Refer to “6-2-7. Main PCB Assy)
3. Remove the two screws (2) that fix the Power Cover (1)
Pull out the Power Cover (1) to your side and lift it to remove.
(1)
(1)
(2) (2)
4. Remove the two connectors (3) that connect to the Power Unit. Remove the four screws (4) that fix the
Power Unit.
(4)
(3)
5. Remove the Power Unit.
GT-3 Series 323

6. Replacing Parts
6-2-11. Surge Absorber PCB Assy

Disassembling
1. Remove the AC Cord and remove the Cover DR (right side). (Refer to “6-1-2. Assembling/Disassembling
of the Covers”.)
2. Remove the Power Cover. (Refer to “6-2-10. Power Unit”.)
3. Remove the two Connectors (2) that connect to Surge Absorber PCB Assy (1). Remove the two screws
(3) that fix the Surge Absorber PCB Assy (1).
Remove the one screw (4) that connects the Ground Wire (green/yellow) from the PCB.
(2) (1) (3) (4)
4. Disconnect and remove the Surge Absorber PCB Assy.
324 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-2-12. Control Box Assy

Adjust the firmware with GT-3 Service Tool, after you replace to the new Control Box. (Refer to “3-3. GT-3
Service Tool”.) Refer to the page “How to connect/disconnect the FFC Connector” in “6-2-18. Replacing the
Carriage PCB Assy” when you handle FFC Connectors.
Required Tools
Thermistor
Disassembling
1. Remove the AC Cord and remove the Cover DR (right side), Cover PB and Cover DB. (Refer to “6-1-2.
Assembling/Disassembling of the Covers”.)
2. Remove the Power Cover. (Refer to “6-2-10. Power Unit”.)
3. Remove the one Connector (1) and the two Faston Terminals (2).
(1)
(2)
4. Remove the two screws (3) that connect the Ground Wire (green/yellow).
Loosen the one screw (5) on the Harness (AC Power) cover (4) of the primary side and the remove the
Cover (4).
(4) (4)
(3)
(5)
(4)
GT-3 Series 325

6. Replacing Parts
5. Remove the two FFC Connectors (7) that connects to the Carriage PCB Assy (6).
Remove all the seven clamps (8) to fix the FFC Cable and then remove the FFC Cable.
<Note>
Refer to the page “How to connect/disconnect the FFC Connector” in “6-2-18. Replacing the Carriage
PCB Assy” when you handle FFC Connectors.
(8)
(8)
(6)
(8)
(7)
6. Remove the one Connector (9) that connects to the Maintenance PCB Assy.
Remove the two Cord Clamps (10) and disconnect the Harness.
(9)
(10)
326 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
7. Remove the one Connector (11) that connects to the Platen Origin Sensor. Remove the two Cord
Clamps (12) and remove the Harness.
(12)
(11)
8. Remove the Platen Motor Connector (13) from the Main PCB Assy in the Control Box.
Remove the Clamp of the Harness and pull it out to the Control Box.
(13)
9. Remove the Panel Upper Cover (14). (Refer to the (1) in “6-2-14. Panel PCB Assy”)
Remove the one Connector (15) that connects the Panel PCB Assy.
Remove the one Connector (16) that connects the USB Host PCB Assy.
(14)
(15)
(16)
GT-3 Series 327

6. Replacing Parts
10. Remove the Connector (18) that connects to the Exhaust Fan (17).
(17)
(18)
11. Remove the Connector (20) that connects the Carriage Motor (19).
(19)
(20)
12. Remove the Connector for Flap Sensor (21) and the Connector for the Flap Solenoid (22).
(21)
(22)
328 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
13. At present all the Harnesses from the Control Box are removed by the step (1) to (13). Arrange those
Harnesses neat around the inlet (black grommet) of the Control Box.
14. Remove the four screws (24) that fix the Control Box Assy.
(24)
15. Rotate the Control box by 90 degrees, the right side of the Control Box to backward, and the left side to
front side, and then remove the Box. Pay attention not to get damaged to those Harnesses.
GT-3 Series 329

6. Replacing Parts
6-2-13. Panel Body Assy

Required Tools
・3 mm Hexagonal wrench
Disassemble
2. Remove the Cover of the Control Box. (Refer to “6-2-10. Power Unit”.)
3. Remove the twelve Screws (2) that fix the Cover PF (1).
Pull out the Cover PF slowly to your side.
(2) (2)
(2)
(1)
(2) (2)
4. Remove the four Bolt Sockets (3) on the both sides of the Panel Body Assy with the Hexagonal wrench.
(3) (3)
330 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
5. Remove the Harness: Panel COM (4) and the Harness: Main USB (5) from the two connectors of the
Panel Body.
(5) (4)
6. Remove the one connector (6) and the two Faston Terminals (7) connected in the Control Box Assy.
(6)
(7)
7. Remove the two Screws (8) that fix the Ground Wires. Remove the Cover (9) by loosing the Screw (10).
(9)
(9)
(10)
(8)
(10)
(9)
8. Remove the Panel Body Assy.

GT-3 Series 331

6. Replacing Parts
6-2-14. Panel PCB Assy

Disassemble
2. Remove the Cover PF. (Refer to “6-2-13. Panel Body Assy”.)
3. Rotate the Print Button (1) counterclockwise with pushing to remove the green part.
(1)
4. Loosen the two Screws (2) on the both side of the Panel Body Assy.
(2)
(2)
5. Remove the two Screws (3) at the bottom of the Panel Body Assy.
(3)
332 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6. Remove the plastic Panel Upper Cover (4) on the top of the Panel Body Assy.
(4)
7. Remove the four connectors on the Panel PCB Assy (5).

Hold the both ends to unlock the lock in disconnecting the FFC (CN4)
(5)
CN4
CN4
CN3
CN1 CN2
8. Remove the four screws with the white collars together that fix the Panel PCB Assy (5).
(5)
(6)
9. Replace the Panel PCB Assy (5) to the new one.

GT-3 Series 333

6. Replacing Parts
6-2-15. USB Host PCB Assy

Disassembling
1. Remove the plastic Panel Upper Cover (4) on the top of the Panel Body Assy. (Refer to “6-2-14. Panel
PCB Assy”.)
2. Remove the one Connector (2) and remove the two screws that fix the PCB.
3 (2)
(1)
3. Remove the USB Host PCB Assy (1).
(1)
334 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-2-16. Encoder PCB Assy

Adjust the firmware with GT-3 Service Tool, after you replace to the new Encoder PCB Assy. (Refer to “3-3.
GT-3 Service Tool”.) Refer to the page “How to connect/disconnect the FFC Connector” in “6-2-18. Carriage
PCB Assy” when you handle FFC Connectors.
Required Tools
・Thermistor
Disassembling
1. Remove the AC Cord and open the Cover UB (1).
(1)
2. Loosen the four Screws (2) on the Encoder Cover F (3) by pulling out to your side.
(2)
(3) (3)
3. Remove the Harness: Encoder (6) from the Connector (5) on the Encoder PCB Assy (4), and then
remove the two Screws (7).
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
4. Remove the Encoder PCB Assy (4).

GT-3 Series 335

6. Replacing Parts
6-2-17. Maintenance PCB Assy

Disassembling
1. Disconnect the AC Cord and remove the Cover PB and Cover DB. (Refer to “6-2-12. Control Box Assy”.)
Maintenance PCB Assy
2. Remove the seven connectors on the Maintenance PCB.

Remove the PCB from the four Supports, 6NS (plastic spacer).
CN1 CN2
(1)
CN5
CN7
CN9
CN12
CN11
336 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-2-18. Carriage PCB Assy

Adjust the firmware with GT-3 Service Tool, after you replace to the new Encoder PCB Assy. (Refer to “3-3.
GT-3 Service Tool”.) Refer to the page “How to connect/disconnect the FFC Connector” in this session (next
page) when you handle FFC Connectors.
Required Tools
・ Thermistor
Disassembling
2. Disconnect the Harness: Encoder (1) from the Connector (CN5) (1) on the Carriage PCB.
Remove the two Fixing Tubes (2) and remove the Carriage PCB Upper Cover (3)
(1)
(3)
CN5
(2)
(3)
3. Disconnect all the FFCs (4) that connect to the Carriage PCB.
<Note>The FFCs (5) in blue frame are not available, depending on the models.
(5)
(4)
GT-3 Series 337

6. Replacing Parts
How to connect/disconnect the FFC Connector

FFC Connector can be disconnected by pulling out the “black plastic” claws at both ends at the same time.
Connect the FFC by inserting the FFC to the Socket and pushing in the both “black plastic” claws at the same
time.
<Note>
・ Make sure that the contact (metal side) of the FFC should be clean and safe, free of grease and damage.
・ Do not touch the contact (metal side) with your fingers.
(6)
4. Remove the four Screws (7) that fix the Carriage PCB Assy.
(7)
5. Remove the Carriage PCB Assy.

338 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-2-19. Ink Sensor PCB Assy

Disassembling
1. Remove the AC Cord and remove the six Screws (2) that fix the Cover Cartridge (1).
(2)
(2)
(1)
(2)
2. Remove the Cover Cartridge (1).

3. Disconnect the Harness: Ink Sensor (5) from the Connector (4) on the Ink Sensor PCB Assy (3).
Remove the one Screw (6) that fixes the PCB.
(5)
(4)
(3)
(6)
4. Remove the Ink Sensor PCB Assy (3).

GT-3 Series 339

6. Replacing Parts
6-2-20. Ink Switch PCB Assy

Disassembling
1. Remove the Cover Cartridge. (Refer to “6-2-19. Ink Sensor PCB Assy”.）
2. Remove the six Screws (1) that fix the Tube Clamp.
(1)
(1)
3. Remove all the nine Connectors (4) on the Ink Switch PCB Assy (3).
Ink Switch 1 Bracket
(3)
(4) (4)
340 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
4. Remove the four Screws (5) that fix the Ink Switch 1 Bracket, where the Ink Switch PCB Assy is mounted.
(5)
(5)
5. Move the Ink Switch 1 Bracket (6) along with the Tubes, with the Ink Switch PCB Assy mounted, and
remove it after it is above the Cartridges.
(6)
6. Disassemble the Ink Switch PCB Assy by removing the six Screws (7) that fix the Ink Switch PCB Assy.
(7)
GT-3 Series 341

6. Replacing Parts
6-2-21. Lithium Battery

Adjust the firmware with GT-3 Service Tool, after you replace to the new Lithium Battery. (Refer to “3-3. GT-3
Service Tool”.)
Required Tools
・ Thermistor
Disassembling
(1)
2. Remove the Lithium Battery (1) by pulling out the holder in the direction of the arrow.
(1)
(1)
3. Pickup the Lithium Battery (1) to the direction of the arrow.
(1)
342 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
6-2-22. FFC
Disassembling
<Note> The operation will be easier to remove the four Screws (1) and the Connector (2), and the
Exhaust Fan (3) beforehand.
(1)
(3)
(2)
3. Remove the two FFC Connectors (4) that are connected to Carriage PCB Assy.
Remove the FFC Cable by removing all the nine Clamps (5) for fixing the FFC.
<Note>
Refer to the page “How to connect/disconnect the FFC Connector” in “6-2-18. Carriage PCB Assy” when
you handle FFC Connectors.
(5)
(5)
(5)
(4)
(5)
GT-3 Series 343

6. Replacing Parts
4. Remove the two FFC Connectors that are connected to the Main PCB Assy.
<Note>
Refer to the section “The mechanism of CN9 and CN12 Connectors” in “6-2-7. Main PCB Assy” when
you handle the FFC Connectors.
Assembling
<Note>
Refer to the section “The mechanism of CN9 and CN12 Connectors” in “6-2-7. Main PCB Assy”, and “How to
connect/disconnect the FFC Connector” in “6-2-18. Carriage PCB Assy” when you handle the FFC
Connectors.
3. Fold the FFC not to give too much

tension to Connectors.
1. Connect the FFC Connectors to

CN9 and CN23 on the Main PCB.
2. The Length of FFC until folding

( ) position
: 210 mm
: 260 mm
344 GT-3 Series

6. Replacing Parts
（(Note for 6 and 7) Insert the Head FFC Support to the mesh of the FFC Sleeve.
(Note for 6)
7. How to fold the FFC at 6. How to fold the FFC with clamps Make the “dent” side of the Head FFC
the FFC clamps Support mount as the inside
Plastic cover
Clamps FFC
Metal plate
9. Fold the claws naturally.
5. Pass the FFC at the backside

of the Encoder Cover.
10. Adjust the 4. Fold the FFC at the FFC Clamp.

length of the FFC
at the curve here.
8. Connect the FFC to the

CN6 and CN8 on the
Carriage PCB.
1. Mount the Exhaust fan with four Screws and connect the Connecter if it is removed for smooth operation.
GT-3 Series 345

7. Transporting the GT-3 Series / Required Maintenance for Long-term Storage
7. Transporting the GT-3 Series / Required Maintenance

for Long-term Storage
This chapter describes the measures required before transportation, moving the printer to another location,
and the maintenance required for long-term storage.
CAUTION
The printer machine weighs approximately 111 kg (245 lb). Transporting and setting up of the printer
should be held in proper way.
The machine may fall down and cause injury.
Be careful not to get your fingers caught when closing the front cover, otherwise it may result in
injury to your fingers.
Take care not to let the liquids: Ink, Wash Liquid, Maintenance Solution, Pretreatment or waste
liquid come into contact with your eyes or onto your skin, otherwise inflammation can result. In case
of contact with eyes, do not rub but immediately rinse the eyes with water.
Furthermore, do not drink the liquids: Ink, Wash Liquid, Maintenance Solution, Pretreatment or
waste liquid under any circumstances, as they can cause vomiting and diarrhea.
7-1. Transporting the GT-3 Series

Requirements:
Prepare the following parts beforehand.
(Necessary number)
Part No. Part Name GT-341 GT-361 GT-381
SB3265 Maintenance Cartridge (Color 1 1 1
SB3264 Maintenance Cartridge W - 1 1 *
GC-50S5K Maintenance Solution (5kg) 1 1 1 *
SB2508 Filter Cartridge 4 4 4 *
SB2512 Filter Cartridge W - 2 4 *
SA5847 IH Head Case 8 12 16
SA5590 Decompress Package 4 6 8
SA5848 Cap Tube 4 6 8
SA5904 Tube Joint 1 4 6 8
SA5905 Tube Joint 2 4 6 8
SA6292 Nozzle Protect Film 4 (4 pcs) 1 2 2
SB4012 Nozzle Cover Sheet 4 (4 pcs) 1 2 2
Your customer may have the * marked parts; some packed with the printer, some consumables.
346 GT-3 Series

Tube Cleaning (Firmware Version 2.10 or higher)
Execute the flushing ink and cleaning Tubes by the sequence of the Tube Cleaning. After you clean all the
Tubes, turn OFF the printer and confirm if the inside of the Tubes, especially the short Tubes between the
Filters and Print Heads. Execute the Tube Cleaning again if you feel insufficient.
White side
Execute the White Tube Cleaning and cancel the process when the Maintenance Solution was flushed with
air. Refer to ”4-1-4. Cleaning the Tubes and Print Heads (white/Color Tube Cleaning)”.
All Whites： Tube Load Mainte- Insert White Ink

Set Maintenance Set Filter
Retrieving Cleaning nance Solution Cartridge or Capping
Cartridge Cartridge
White Ink Cartridge
Cancel the process after the Filter Cartridge exhausts the Maintenance Solution with air.
1. Execute the step 1 to 9 in ”4-1-4. Cleaning the Tubes and Print Heads (white/Color Tube Cleaning)”.
Refer to the 4-1-4 of this Service Manual.
2. Cancel the process by pressing the Stop Button when you hear the peep sounds and see the message
“Set Maintenance Cartridge”, when the Maintenance Solution was flushed with Filter Cartridge.
3. Repeat the steps 1-2 above to clean all the Tubes and Print Heads.
Color side
4. Repeat the process of Color Tube Cleaning twice.
Refer to ”4-1-4. Cleaning the Tubes and Print Heads (white/Color Tube Cleaning)”.
5. After the Color Tube Cleaning is done, insert the Filter Cartridge and execute the Tube Cleaning one
more time to flush the Maintenance Solution inside the Tubes and Print Heads.
6. Repeat the steps 1-2 above to clean all the Tubes and Print Heads.
Uninstallation of Print Heads

<Important!>
・Print Heads are delicate and easy to damage, please handle with care.
・Do not mount/dismount the Print Heads on the Maintenance Unit; the surface of the Print Heads will hit
the edge of Wiper Cleaner (2) and may cause serious damage. Select the menu from the Operation
Panel or move the Carriage over the Flushing Plate (1) by hand.
* Be sure to remove the Wiper Cleaners (2) and lower the Caps (3) beforehand if you have to operate on
the Maintenance Unit.
GT-3 Series 347

1. Turn ON the printer and move the Platen to the inside of the printer with Platen Button.
2. Select [ Maintenance ] > [ Head Replacement ] of the menu, select any Print Head and press the OK
Button.
<Note>
This operation is to move the Caps down and the Carriage to the side.
3. The Carriage moves to the right, above the Flushing Plate. Follow the message on the Display and turn
OFF the printer.
4. After you turn OFF the printer, remove the Print Heads safe by referring to “6-1-38. Print Heads”.
5. Connect the Tube Joint 1 (2) and 2 (3) to the Tube (1).
(1)
(2)
(3)
6. Connect the Cap Tube (4) and Tube Joint 1 (2) and 2 (3) to the Print Heads.
(3)
(2)
(4)
7. Clean the Nozzle Cover Sheet (5) with Wash Liquid or Maintenance Solution and apply it on the surface
of the Nozzles.
(5)
348 GT-3 Series

8. Cover the removed Print Head with Nozzle Protect Film [SA6292] (6).
<Note>
・ Mount the Print Head with the Nozzle Protect Film (6) covering the Print Head. Without this film the
surface of the Print Head Nozzles may be seriously damaged in installation.
・ Insert the Nozzle Protect Film (6) between the Knob (7) and the PCB Cover (8), and fix it with
adhesive tape (10) on the Damper Case Support (9).
(10)
(8)
(9)
(7)
(6)
9. Settle the Print Head in IH Head Case (11) and fix it with a rubber band (12) and adhesive tape (10) x 2.
(10)
(12)
(11)
(10)
<Note>
Reinstall the removed Print Head on the printer within 3 days and install the ink for protection.
That’s all the operation for service engineer.
Announcement to the customer:

* Your customer should pay for the damage during the transportation. Confirm the procedures
beforehand with the transportation company.
* Be careful in crating; pack the printer in proper way. No stress to the covers or they may be
seriously damaged in transportation.
* Refer to "2. Setting up GT-3 Series", and arrange all the settings done by specified technicians.
GT-3 Series 349

7-2. Required Maintenance for the Long Storage

There are two types of storage: “A. Only Color Ink is printed with GT-381/GT-361” and “B. In case you do not
run the printer at all” and each requires different maintenance.
Prepare the storage in the following procedures and keep maintenance once in two weeks to keep your
printer in good conditions.
Preparation before storage Maintenance once in two weeks
Color side: - Color side: -

White side: White side:
Execute Tube Cleaning, install Execute Tube Cleaning one by
A. Only Color Ink is printed
‘almost empty but not expired’ one and fill the Tubes with fresh
with GT-381/GT-361
White Ink Cartridges on the Maintenance Solution. Install
Slots; Tubes filled with ‘almost empty but not expired’
Maintenance Solution. White Ink Cartridges on the
Slots.
Color side: Color side:

Clean the Caps and Wipers, Confirm that the Caps and Wipers
inject Wash Liquid into the should be clean. Inject Wash
Caps. Liquid into the Caps again.
B. In case you do not run the White side: White side:
printer at all Execute Tube Cleaning. Insert Fill the Tubes with Maintenance
the Capping Cartridges* with Solution and cover the needles
Tubes filled with Maintenance with Capping Cartridges*.
Solution.
<Note>
・The menu [ GT-341 mode ] is for GT-381/GT-361 with no White Print Heads mounted. If you select this
menu with White Print Heads mounted, the White Print Heads will surely get damaged by no maintenance.
・Do not run the printer when you mount Capping Cartridge. The Print Heads may be seriously damaged.
・Keep the Maintenance operation once in every two weeks, even if the printer is under A or B conditions to
keep the printer in good conditions.
・Use Wash Liquid for cleaning GT-3. You can use the one in the Nozzle Cleaning Kit, the Maintenance
Cleaning Kit, or you can purchase one. It is recommended to have one with you.
(The following pages show the details.)
0079Y
350 GT-3 Series

A. Only Color Ink is printed with GT-381/GT-361
Preparation before storage

Execute White Tube Cleaning; select [ All Whites ] to retrieve White Ink. Refer to “4-1-4. Cleaning the Tubes
and Print Heads (white/Color Tube Cleaning)” for more details. After Tube Cleaning is finished, insert ‘almost
empty but not expired’ White Ink Cartridges on the Slots, with Tubes filled with Maintenance Solution.
<Note> White Ink is fired for maintenance even when you print with only Color Ink.
<Note>
・ Do not use the White Ink Cartridges that you have used in storage; the White Ink and Maintenance
Solution are being mixed and the whiteness will be decreased, which may
・ The menu [ GT-341 mode ] is for GT-381/GT-361 with no White Print Heads mounted. If you select this
menu with White Print Heads mounted, the White Print Heads will surely get damaged by no
maintenance.
Maintenance once in every two weeks

Be sure to execute this maintenance process once in every two weeks. Keep the Tubes filled with fresh
1. Execute Tube Cleaning ONE BY ONE individually, not to retrieve the Maintenance Solution into the
Maintenance Cartridge.
Refer to ”4-1-4. Cleaning the Tubes and Print Heads (white/Color Tube Cleaning)”.
<Note>
Execute Tube Cleaning ONE BY ONE individually, or the old Maintenance Solution will be retrieved into
the Maintenance Cartridge and give serious damage.
2. Fill the Tubes with fresh Maintenance Solution by repeating the step 1 in the above.
3. After you confirm that the Tubes are full of Maintenance Solution, then install ‘almost empty but not
expired’ White Ink Cartridges on the Slots.
Restart the White Ink printing

Reinstall the White Ink by referring the steps in “C. Restart after 2 weeks’ storage” in this chapter.
GT-3 Series 351

B. In case you do not run the printer at all
Preparation before storage

1. Execute White Tube Cleaning; select [ All Whites ] to retrieve White Ink. Refer to “4-1-4. Cleaning the
Tubes and Print Heads (white/Color Tube Cleaning)” for more details. After Tube Cleaning is finished,
insert the Capping Cartridges (option) with Tubes filled with Maintenance Solution.
2. Next, clean the Caps, Wipers and around the Maintenance Unit. Select [ Maintenance ] > [ Nozzle
Cleaning ] and press the OK Button. The Platen is loaded and the Caps move down. Follow the message
and turn off the printer, and open the Front Cover with both hands until it is locked with the stopper.
3. Clean the Caps and Wipers by referring "6-1-2. Replacing the Wiper Cleaner and Cleaning the Caps /
Wipers" in the Instruction Manual. Replace to new Wiper Cleaners if necessary.
4. Pour 7 and 8 drops of Wash Liquid to the Print Head Caps of Color side to prevent from ink clogging
inside of the Maintenance Unit.
<Note> Be careful not to spill the Wash Liquid around the Print Head Caps.
0080Y
5. Push the Stop Lever to release the lock when you close the Front Cover with both hands and turn ON
the printer.
6. After the initialization is finished successfully, turn OFF the printer and store.
Maintenance once in every two weeks

Be sure to execute this maintenance process once in every two weeks. Keep the White Tubes filled with fresh
White side
1. Fill the bottle with Maintenance Solution and confirm in advance the amount of the Waste Ink in the
Waste Ink Tank.
2. Insert the Maintenance Cartridge, close the Air-In Cap, and select [ Maintenance ] > [ Load White ] of the
menu to load Maintenance Solution.
Confirm the fresh Maintenance Solution fills the Tube and insert the Capping Cartridge. Execute this
process to all White Print Heads.
<Note>
If you find that the Tubes look white, mixing the Maintenance Solution with remained White Ink, execute
the White Tube Cleaning.
Color Side
Pour 7 and 8 drops of Wash Liquid to the caps, referring to the steps 4 to 6 in the Preparation before storage
above.
Restart the White Ink printing

Reinstall the White Ink by referring the steps in “C. Restart after 2 weeks’ storage” in this chapter.
352 GT-3 Series

C. Restart after 2 weeks’ storage
1. Insert the well-agitated White Ink Cartridges by replacing from either Capping Cartridges or ‘almost
empty but not expired’ White Ink Cartridges. If the Tubes are filled with Maintenance Solution with no air
inside, then install the White Ink by referring to the steps in “4-1-4. Cleaning the Tubes and Print Heads
(white/Color Tube Cleaning)” If you find some air inside the Tube, then select [ Maintenance ] > [ Load
White] of the menu and install the Maintenance Solution first with the Maintenance Cartridge and then
install the White Ink. Follow the indication on the Display.
2. After loading the White Ink, print Nozzle Check Pattern for both Color and White in [ Test Print ] menu to
find out the print quality. If the print quality is not good enough, especially Color side, clean the surface of
the Print Heads by referring "5-1-2. Cleaning the Print Head Nozzles" of the Instruction Manual.
<Note>
The Auto Cleaning of Color side will be Powerful Cleaning after you leave the printer unused for more than
two weeks.
GT-3 Series 353

8. Error Code List
8. Error Code List

This chapter provides a list of error messages and error codes displayed on the printer Operation Panels, and
an explanation of how to solve those issues.
8-1. Interpreting the Display

Example of error message:
Error Code： 2105 Shows the error code (4-digit number) that occurs
No Files Shows the details of the error

Shows the required operation
Press OK
8-2. Warnings
Messages for error codes 1000 to 1007 are written only to log files, and not indicated on the Display.
Error
Message Meaning Solution
code
1000 (INK LOW Black) Black ink level is too low.
1001 (INK LOW Magenta) Magenta ink level is too low.
1002 (INK LOW Cyan) Cyan ink level is too low.
Prepare a new black Ink Cartridge.

1003 (INK LOW Yellow) Yellow ink level is too low.
Confirm if Ink Switch PCB Assy and the Ink Detection Plate
1004 (INK LOW White-1)) White W1 ink level is too low. in the Ink Cartridge are properly working.
1005 (INK LOW White-2) White W2 ink level is too low.

Temperature of Black Print
1030 K Head Temp Rising
Head is increasing.
M Head Temp Temperature of Magenta Print
1031
Rising Head is increasing.
Temperature of Cyan Print
1032 C Head Temp Rising
Head is increasing.
Temperature of Yellow Print
1033 Y Head Temp Rising Wait with the printer unused, to decrease the
Head is increasing.
W1 Head Temp Temperature of White-1 Print temperature. Confirm if the Flat Cable of the Print
1034 Head is connected properly.
W2 Head Temp Temperature of White-2 Print
1035
1036
1037
1051 CR Motor Life The Carriage Motor is worn. Replace the Carriage Motor.
354 GT-3 Series

8. Error Code List
Error
code
The ambient temperature is Raise the room temperature.
below the range that maintains
1060 Temp Low: Replace the Carriage PCB and adjust the temperature with
the print quality. “xxx” is the
current temperature. GT-3 Service Tool.
The ambient temperature is Raise the room temperature.

above the range that maintains
1061 Temp High: Replace the Carriage PCB and adjust the temperature with
the print quality. “xxx” is the
current temperature. GT-3 Service Tool.
1070 Battery Life The battery ran out. Replace the Main PCB battery.
The internal clock has not been

1080 RTC not Adjusted Set the time with GT-3 Service Tool.
set.
1100 Pump Tube Life Exchange Pump Tube. Replace the Pump Tube.
W1 needs to do Tube
1111 Clean Tube W1 Execute Tube Cleaning W1.
Cleaning.
W2 needs to do Tube
Cleaning.
W3 needs to do Tube
Cleaning.
W4 needs to do Tube
Cleaning.
Needs to exchange the Exchange the Maintenance Parts and clean the inside of
Exchange
1200 Maintenance Parts and to the printer. See "6-1. Replacing Consumables" of the
Maintenance Parts
clean the printer. Instruction Manual.
Needs to exchange the Exchange the Maintenance Parts and clean the inside of
Exchange
1201 Maintenance Parts and to the printer. See "6-1. Replacing Consumables" of the
Maintenance Parts
clean the printer. Instruction Manual.
The Fan to exhaust ink mist is Confirm the Harness in the Exhaust Fan.
1210 Exhaust Fan Stop
stopped. Replace the Exhaust Fan.
1220 Exchange Filter K K/C Filter needs to be Replace with the new K/C Filter on the K Print Head.
replaced.
1221 Exchange Filter M M/Y Filter needs to be Replace with the new M/Y Filter on the M Print Head.
replaced.
1222 Exchange Filter C K/C Filter needs to be Replace with the new K/C Filter on the C Print Head.
replaced.
1223 Exchange Filter Y M/Y Filter needs to be Replace with the new M/Y Filter on the Y Print Head.
replaced.
GT-3 Series 355

8. Error Code List
8-3. Error Messages

Error
code
2000 NO INK Black Black Ink Cartridge is not installed.

Magenta Ink Cartridge is not
2001 NO INK Magenta
installed.
2002 NO INK Cyan Cyan Ink Cartridge is not installed.
Yellow Ink Cartridge is not Install an Ink Cartridge.

2003 NO INK Yellow
installed. Confirm if Ink Switch PCB Assy and the Ink
White 1 Ink Cartridge is not Detection Plate in the Ink Cartridge are properly
2004 NO INK White-1 working.
installed.
White 2 Ink Cartridge is not
2005 NO INK White-2
installed.
2006 NO INK White-3
installed.
2007 NO INK White-4
installed.
2020 EMPTY Black Black Ink Cartridge ran out of ink.
Magenta Ink Cartridge ran out of

2021 EMPTY Magenta
ink.
2022 EMPTY Cyan Cyan Ink Cartridge ran out of ink.
2023 EMPTY Yellow Yellow Ink Cartridge ran out of ink. Replace to a new White Cartridge.
Confirm if Ink Switch PCB Assy and the Ink
White 1 Ink Cartridge ran out of Detection Plate in the Ink Cartridge are properly
2024 EMPTY White-1 working.
ink.
White 2 Ink Cartridge ran out of
2025 EMPTY White-2
ink.
2026 EMPTY White-3
ink.
2027 EMPTY White-4
ink.
No Wiper Cleaner The Wiper Cleaner for CMYK is Install the Wiper Cleaner to the CMYK side.
2041
(CMYK) not installed. Confirm the microswitch if it properly works.
No Wiper Cleaner The Wiper Cleaner or White is not Install the Wiper Cleaner to the White side.
2042 (White) installed. Confirm the microswitch if it properly works.
The ambient temperature is under

2050 Temp Low
the operative temperature rage. Raise or drop the room temperature.
Replace the Carriage PCB and adjust the proper
The ambient temperature is over temperature with GT-3 Service Tool.
2051 Temp High
operative temperature rage.
Remove the obstacle, flat the platen surface and

The Clearance Sensor detected
then press OK Button.
2070 Obstacle on the Platen an obstacle on the Platen (or the
Confirm the Solenoid Jam Assy; the alignment
media) in loading the Platen.
between Sensor Flap Dog and the Sensor.
Re-mount the USB flash drive. Confirm the spec

USB flash drive Not USB flash drive is not properly and type of the USB flash drive. Try another USB
2100
Ready mounted. flash drive. Confirm the connection between USB
Host PCB Assy and Main PCB.
Check the free space of the USB flash drive with

The USB flash drive does not have
2101 Not Enough Area PC.
enough area for saving.
Mount a USB flash drive with free area available.
356 GT-3 Series

8. Error Code List
Error
code
Re-mount the USB flash drive. Check with PC if
The mounted USB flash drive is
USB flash drive Access the USB flash drive is available.
2102 out of support, or USB flash drive
Error Confirm if the USB flash drive is formatted with
is broken.
FAT16 (FAT) or FAT 32.
Re-mount the USB flash drive. Check with PC if
the USB flash drive is available.
Confirm if the USB flash drive is formatted with
FAT16 (FAT) or FAT 32.
Confirm the USB flash drive by executing
No available data in the USB flash
2105 No Files CHKDSK on PC if the file system is available.
drive.
Try another USB flash drive.
Confirm the proper file is saved in the USB flash
drive. Confirm the file format or extension (ar3).
Copy the print data to the USB flash drive.
Remake the print data on PC.
This error occurs when the USB cable is
disconnected during data transmission, or data
GT-3 failed to receive the print transmission is canceled on the PC.
3000 PC Communication Error
data from the PC. Check the connection between the PC and GT-3.
Confirm if the GT-3 is offline. Reboot both the PC
and GT-3.
This error occurs when the USB cable is
disconnected during data transmission, or GT-3
The PC will not receive the data tools are canceled in sending data to the PC.
3001 PC Communication Error
sent from GT-3. Check the connection between the PC and GT-3,
and retry the PC operation with the GT-3 tools. If it
has no effect, reboot both the PC and GT-3.
GT-3 received the data that is not

3002 Check the connection between the PC and GT-3,
supported.
and send print data again. Or reboot both the PC
and GT-3.
No compatibility of version Confirm the versions of both firmware and Printer
3003 between the PC driver and the Driver.
GT-3 firmware.
Execute the firmware update from PC (GT-3
The Check Sums for the received
Firmware Update) from the beginning. Avoid the
3004 program data did not correspond
noisy condition.
when updating the firmware.
Try with another USB cable.
The Check Sums for the received Execute the PC operation from the beginning.
3005 PC Data Error data did not correspond when Avoid the noisy condition.
updating the EEPROM. Try with another USB cable.
3010 Irregular maintenance command

was mixed in the normal Job.
Reboot GT-3 and send the print data again. These
errors may occur when GT-3 malfunctions in
improper environment. You can print if no error is
PC asks to terminate the job by
3013 indicated.
Job End command
Confirm the versions of both firmware and Printer
Driver.
Try with another USB cable.
3014 Length error of PC command
Confirm that the Machine Mode is GT-341 by

PC Data Error (with GT-341 received the print data
3100 Printer Driver. GT-341 cannot receive the print data
White) with White print data included.
with White print data included.
GT-361 received the print data Confirm that the Machine Mode is GT-361 by
PC Data Error (381
3101 with 4 White Print Head data Printer Driver. GT-361 cannot receive the print data
mode)
included. with four White Print Head data included.
GT-3 Series 357

8. Error Code List
Error
code
GT-3 received blank data, the print
data with no print data included
Confirm the print data with GT-3 File Viewer.
(e.g. 255 white) was made and
3407 Blank Data Confirm the print area and paper size with e.g.
sent to GT-3, the image was larger
Photoshop Print Preview.
than the print area and some blank
part was sent to GT-3, etc.
Reboot GT-3 and send the print data again. These

The size of the received print data improper environment. You can print if no error is
3408 PC Data Error (too large)
was too large. indicated.
Driver.
Illegal sequence (irregular graphic

3410 data start command) Reboot GT-3 and send the print data again. These
PC Data Error Illegal sequence (irregular graphic improper environment. You can print if no error is
3411 data end command) indicated.
Driver.
3412 No Job start command
4100 The file cannot be opened.
4101 No file can be created. Re-mount the USB flash drive. Check with PC if
the USB flash drive is available.
Confirm if the USB flash drive is formatted with
4102 The file cannot be closed. FAT16 (FAT) or FAT 32.
Confirm the USB flash drive by executing
CHKDSK on PC if the file system is available.
4103 Failure in searching file Try another USB flash drive.
4104 Failure in reading file
Re-mount the USB flash drive. Check the free

USB flash drive Access space of the USB flash drive with PC.
Error Write the print data on the USB flash drive from
4105 Failure in writing file
PC. Confirm if the USB flash drive is formatted with
FAT16 (FAT) or FAT 32. Try another USB flash
drive.
4106 Illegal file data

Confirm if the print data is made by GT-3 Printer
Driver. Copy the print data to the USB flash drive.
Remake the print data with PC.
4107 Illegal file size
4108 Failure to get the file size

Re-mount the USB flash drive. Confirm if the print
data is made by GT-3 Printer Driver.
Try another USB flash drive.
4109 No Files Failure in searching file
Confirm the proper file is saved in the USB flash

drive. Confirm the file format or extension (ar3).
4110 No Files No file is found.
Copy the print data to the USB flash drive.
Remake the print data on PC.
358 GT-3 Series

8. Error Code List
Error
code
4200
Press OK Button to recover.
Error in selected language data for Update firmware again from the beginning if you
4201 Message data Error
the Display. find this error after you cancel the firmware update.
Select “Language” and reset the language.
4202
4300 Press OK Button to recover.

Update firmware again from the beginning if you
4301 Font data Error Error in font data for the Display.
find this error after you cancel the firmware update.
Select “Language” and reset the language.
4302
4400
Press OK Button to recover.
Error in the Print Data in the menu
4401 Test print data Error Update firmware again from the beginning if you
for Test Print Data
find this error after you cancel the firmware update.
4402
Press OK Button to recover. Check the network
4500 Machine Error Cannot start the Network Interface and contact your Network Administrator.
Replace the Main PCB.
Press OK Button to recover. Assign the proper IP
address and Subnet mask with GT-3 Maintenance
Detects Illegal IP address and/or
4501 Machine Error Tool. Assign all “zero” for customer who does not
Subnet mask.
use LAN connection. Refer to “6-2-7. Main PCB
Assy”.
Press OK Button to recover. Check the network
4502 Machine Error Cannot assign Network Interface and contact your Network Administrator.
Press OK Button to recover. Assign the proper IP

4503 Machine Error Detects Illegal Default Gateway address and Subnet mask with GT-3 Maintenance
Tool.
5001
5002 Communication error inside the Turn OFF and ON the printer.
Machine Error
firmware. Replace the Main PCB.
5020
5021
5090 Caps were not open.

Machine Error Confirm the Cap Motor and Cap Origin Sensor if
5091 Caps were not closed. they work properly.
Confirm the Wiper Motor and Wiper Origin Sensor
if they work properly.
5092 Wipers were not move (outward). Replace the Harness: Maintenance COM.
Machine Error Replace the Main PCB.
Wipers were not move
5093
(homeward).
5094 Platen did not load.
Confirm the Platen Motor, Belts and sensor.

5095 Machine Error Platen did not unload. Replace the Main PCB.
5096 Platen did not do LF.
Turn OFF and ON the printer.

5101 Machine Error Illegal print area of the print data
5102 Machine Error Failure of unfolding print data The issue is in firmware; contact Brother via your
dealer.
GT-3 Series 359

8. Error Code List
Error
code
5200 If no sounds in initialization or the serial number is
*299**** with 5200, replace the Harness: MNT
Solenoid and Maintenance PCB to new. Confirm
5201
the operator not to move the Platen by hand, or the
PCBs may be seriously damaged.
5230
Communication error between
Machine Error
Main PCB and Maintenance Unit Confirm if there is any device around GT-3 that
5231 makes strong noise. Move GT-3 from that device.
Confirm the connection of Harness: Maintenance
5232 COM between Main PCB and Maintenance PCB.
Replace the Maintenance PCB and Harness:
5233 Maintenance COM.
Confirm if the firmware (.bwf) is proper version

Maintenance PCB Ver. Illegal version of Maintenance
5260 when the error occurred just after you updated.
Error PCB Firmware
Update firmware again from the beginning.
5300 Confirm if there is any device around GT-3 that

Internal communication error
makes strong noise. Move GT-3 from that device.
Machine Error between Maintenance Unit and
Main PCB
COM between Main PCB and Maintenance PCB.
5301

5302 Machine Error Illegal maintenance sequence The issue is in firmware; contact Brother via your
dealer.
5311 W1 Ink Sensor malfunction

Confirm the Harness: Ink Sensor between Ink
Switch PCB Assy and Ink Sensor PCB Assy.
Confirm the Harness: Ink MNT between
Machine Error
Maintenance PCB and Ink Switch PCB Assy.
5315 Black Ink Sensor malfunction Confirm if the position is proper where Ink Switch
PCB Assy and Ink Sensor PCB Assy are mounted.
5316 Magenta Ink Sensor malfunction
5317 Cyan Ink Sensor malfunction
5318 Yellow Ink Sensor malfunction
5401
5402
5403
5404
Confirm if there is any device around GT-3 that

5405 Communication error between makes strong noise. Move GT-3 from that device.
Machine Error
Main PCB and Maintenance Unit Confirm the connection of Harness: Maintenance
5411
5412
5413
5414
360 GT-3 Series

8. Error Code List
Error
code
5421 Confirm if something covers the hole on Pump

Failure of moving Pump in the Rotor Gear. Clean to keep the transparency.
Machine Error
Maintenance Unit Confirm the motion of Pump Motor and Pump
5422 Rotation Sensor.
5431
5432
Confirm if the Wiper Cleaners and Wiper Blades
Failure of moving Caps in the are properly mounted in the Maintenance Unit.
5433 Machine Error
Maintenance Unit Confirm if the Wiper Cleaners are distorted.
Confirm that something may prevent the Caps
5434 moving up and down and/or Wipers moving
horizontally.
5435 Confirm the Cap Motor and Cap Origin Sensor if
they work properly.
5441 Confirm the Wiper Motor and Wiper Origin Sensor
Failure of moving Wipers in the if they work properly.
Machine Error
5442 Maintenance Unit
5443
5451
Internal error of Maintenance Unit Upgrade the firmware again from the beginning.
5452 Machine Error
caused by firmware update Replace the Maintenance PCB.
5453
5454
Confirm if there is any device around GT-3 that
5455 Communication error between
Upgrade the firmware again from the beginning.
Machine Error Main PCB and the Maintenance
Unit caused by firmware update
Replace the Maintenance PCB.
5457
Internal error of Maintenance Unit Upgrade the firmware again from the beginning.
5458 Machine Error
caused by firmware update Replace the Maintenance PCB.
5471
5472
5473 Confirm if there is any device around GT-3 that

5474 Communication error between
Confirm the Harness: Ink Sensor between Ink
Machine Error Maintenance Unit and Ink Sensor
Switch PCB Assy and Ink Sensor PCB Assy.
5475 PCB
Confirm the Harness: Ink MNT between
Maintenance PCB and Ink Switch PCB Assy.
5476
5477
5478
5491 Turn OFF and ON the printer.

Machine Error Internal Error of Maintenance Unit The issue is in firmware; contact Brother via your
dealer.
Confirm the motions of Solenoid Jam Assy, the

Clearance Sensor
6004 Malfunction of Clearance Sensor Sensor Flap Dog and Photo Interrupter.
Failure
GT-3 Series 361

8. Error Code List
Error
code
Machine Error Failure of writing to EEPROM in
6010
Main PCB
Machine Error Failure of deleting Flash ROM in If the version of firmware is lower than 1.20, the
6011 6012 surely occurs in writing Log. Refer to
Main PCB
“3-2-3-4. Upgrade in Flash ROM writing error”.
Machine Error Failure of writing Flash ROM in
6012 Main PCB In other cases, replace the Main PCB.
Machine Error
6020 Illegal Real Time Clock
6021 Fail: No Battery Dead Battery of Real Time Clock Replace the Battery on the Main PCB.
Platen Button may be

6031 Fail: Panel Button
malfunctioning.
Print Button may be
malfunctioning.
Stop Button may be
malfunctioning.
Check it something is on the Control Panel and
Back Button may be pushing the button.
malfunctioning. These errors may occur when some button is
pushing in turning ON the printer.
6035 Fail: Panel Button OK Button may be malfunctioning. Confirm the cable that connects to the Panel PCB.
Replace the Panel PCB.
Down Button may be
malfunctioning.
6037 Fail: Panel Button Up Button may be malfunctioning.
Head Cleaning Button may be

malfunctioning.
In initialization: confirm the connection of the Head

Detection Memory and turn OFF and ON the
printer. The issue is in firmware; contact Brother
via your dealer.
In operation: this may occur by other malfunction.
6040 Machine Error Could not detect Head Memory (Platen stepping out, overvoltage, etc.) Confirm the
log file, and communication between PCBs (via
Harness: Maintenance COM). Confirm the
operator not to move the Platen by hand, or the
printer may be seriously damaged.
Replace the Main PCB, which may be damaged.
Adjust CR Speed if the error occurs in setup.

Clean the inside of GT-3, especially the Guide
Machine Error Illegal Carriage Move (Speed
6100 Shaft (wipe off with alcohol and grease-up) and
Adjust CR Error)
replace CR Felts to move the Carriage smoothly.
Then adjust CR speed after cleaning.
6101 Machine Error Carriage move did not complete.

6102 Shaft (wipe off with alcohol and grease-up) and the
Machine Error Failure in stopping the Carriage at Encoder Strip, replace CR Felts to move the
Adjust CR the proper position Carriage smoothly. Then adjust the CR speed after
6103
cleaning.
Replace the Carriage Motor.
CR time-out of the Carriage during Replace the Encoder Strip.
6104
printing Replace the Carriage PCB and the Main PCB.
Machine Error
CR time-out of the Carriage during
6105
flashing
362 GT-3 Series

8. Error Code List
Error
code
Confirm if the ink mist prevents the Carriage Motor.
Apply some grease on the gear of the Motor.
Confirm the alignment of Encoder PCB Sensor and
6106 Machine Error
the Encoder Strip. Clean the Encoder Strip and the
Guide Shaft, and then adjust the CR speed.
Confirm the operator not to move the Platen by
Malfunction of Origin Sensor in CR
hand, or the printer may be seriously damaged.
returning to the origin
Replace the Main PCB, which may be damaged
with 5200 error.
6107 Machine Error Replace the Encoder Strip.
Replace the Carriage PCB.

Shaft (wipe off with alcohol and grease-up) and the
Encoder Strip, replace CR Felts to move the
Carriage smoothly. Confirm the alignment of
Encoder PCB Sensor and the Encoder Strip.
Illegal termination of CR returning
6108 Machine Error Adjust the CR speed.
to the origin
Confirm the FFC: Carriage Signal that connects
between the Main PCB and the Carriage PCB.
Replace the Origin Sensor.
6109 Machine Error

6110 Machine Error Shaft (wipe off with alcohol and grease-up) and the
Carriage smoothly. Adjust the CR speed.
6111 Machine Error Illegal adjustment of CR Speed
Replace the Encoder Strip.
6112 Machine Error Replace the Carriage PCB.
6113 Machine Error
Machine Error Confirm the alignment of the sensor on the

Encoder PCB.
Shaft (wipe off with alcohol and grease-up) and the
6114 Abnormal decrease of CR Speed Carriage smoothly. Confirm the alignment of
Encoder PCB Sensor and the Encoder Strip.
Adjust the CR speed.
Replace the Encoder Strip.
Abnormal temperature of Black
6120
Print Head
Abnormal temperature of Magenta
6121
Print Head
Abnormal temperature of Cyan
6122 Stop printing and wait until the temperature of the
Print Head
Print Head goes down.
Abnormal temperature of Yellow
6123 Confirm the Print Head by touching softly the heat
Print Head
Machine Error sink. Confirm the connection of FFC if it is inserted
Abnormal temperature of White-1 at an angle if the error still occurs when the heat
6124 Print Head sink is cool enough, or just after setup.
Abnormal temperature of
6125
White-2Print Head
Abnormal temperature of White-3
6126
Print Head
Abnormal temperature of White-4
6127
Print Head
GT-3 Series 363

8. Error Code List
Error
code
Confirm the FFC: Carriage Power and its
connectors that connect between the Carriage
PCB and Main PCB.
Remove all the Head FFCs that connect to
Carriage PCB and confirm that this error still exists.
6134 Machine Error Abnormal Print Head voltage
If the error is still there, then replace the Main PCB.
If the error stops, then replace the Carriage PCB
and then connect the Print Head FFCs one and
another to confirm the damage.
Replace the Print Head with error.
Illegal circuit of detecting Print Replace the Main PCB.
6154 Machine Error
Head Temperature Reboot the printer.
Confirm the FFC: Carriage Signal and its
Malfunction of Environmental connectors that connect between the Carriage
6160 Machine Error
Temperature Sensor PCB and Main PCB.
7000 Machine Error System Call error Reboot the printer.
The issue is in firmware; contact Brother via your
7013 Machine Error General Program Error dealer.
Print Data not received with no

7014
space in print data buffer Send the print data when the printer is either
PC Data Error
Print Data nor received because “standby” or “ready”.
7015
printing is not complete
Reboot the printer.
Internal Program Error
7125 Machine Error The issue is in firmware; contact Brother via your
(Moving error: too close to move)
dealer.
364 GT-3 Series

9. Block Diagram of the Control Circuit
365
(W1) (W2) (W3) (W4) (K) (M) (C) (Y)
INK SENSOR PCB ASSY
INK SENSOR PCB ASSY
INK SENSOR PCB ASSY
INK SENSOR PCB ASSY
INK SENSOR PCB ASSY
INK SENSOR PCB ASSY

INK SENSOR PCB ASSY
INK SENSOR PCB ASSY
MOTOR:STA-42D2
MOTOR:STA-42D2
MOTOR:STA-42D2
HARNESS:MNT MOTOR W
HARNESS:MNT MOTOR C
SB2402 (PUMP)
HARNESS:MNT MOTOR P
SB2402 (WIPE)
SB2402 (CAP)
SB2350
SB2350
SB2350
SB2350
SB2350
SB2350
SB2350
SB2350
CN101(4p) CN101(4p) CN101(4p) CN101(4p) CN101(4p) CN101(4p) CN101(4p) CN101(4p)

6p 6p 6p
HARNESS:INK SENSOR X8
SB2373
SB2372
SB2370 SB2371
CN9(4p) CN8(4p) CN7(4p) CN6(4p) CN5(4p) CN4(4p) CN3(4p) CN2(4p) CN9(4p) CN1(4p) CN7(4p) CN13(16p)
HARNESS:INK MNT HARNESS:MNT SOLE
EXP IN
SB2368 SB2375
MAINTEANCE PCB ASSY
CN11(20p)
CN1(6p)
CN12(6p)
SB1571
INK SWITCH PCB ASSY
SB2348 DEBUG CPU
SERIAL OCD
EXP OUT 2p 2p 2p 2p 2p 2p 2p 2p 2p 2p SLR
CN2(13p) CN6(3p) CN8(16p) CN4(24p) CN5(4p) 2p 2p 2p 2p 2p 2p 2p 2p 2p 2p SLP
PHOTO INTERRUPTER:SG-2482A
3p
LG2239 (PUMP)
GT3 SOLENOID W_RET ASSY

GT3 SOLENOID VENT ASSY
GT3 SOLENOID W1 ASSY

GT3 SOLENOID M ASSY
GT3 SOLENOID Y ASSY
GT3 SOLENOID C ASSY
GT3 SOLENOID K ASSY

PHOTO INTERRUPTER:SG-2482A DCFAN MOTOR
3p
HARNESS:MAINTENANCE COM
HARNESS:MNT SENSOR
LG2239(WIPE) SB3039
3p
9. Block Diagram of the Control Circuit
LG2239 (CAP)
SB2846
SB2845
SB2844
SB2843
SB2847
SB2848
SB2849
SB2850
SB2851
SB2852
CASSET SW HARNESS ASSY
2p
2p
SB2461 3p SLR
SB2374
3p SLP
CASSET SW HARNESS ASSY
2p
2p
SB2461
HARNESS:FAN
SB2380
SB3016
SLR
SLP
CN8(8p) CN7(14p) CN3(4p)
HARNESS:PL ATEN ORIGIN
CN14(3p)
SB2388
GT-3 Series
EXP OUT EXP IN
3p
CN10(6p)
HEAD DETECTOR UNIT GT3 LG2239 (PL
ATEN)
SB2961
(W1) (W2) (W3) (W4)
CN4(5p)
IH2D HEAD ASSY
IH2D HEAD ASSY
IH2D HEAD ASSY
IH2D HEAD ASSY

PLATEN PULSE MOTOR
IH2 HEAD FFC X8
SB2401
CN23(4p)
BACK SIDE
SB3185
SB3185
SB3185
SB3185
USB HOST PCB ASSY
USB
CN15(4p)
CN2(4p)
CN1(4p)
SB2362
FRONT SIDE
SB2398
36p 36p 36p 36p
CN22(8p)
HARNESS:MAIN USB
MAIN PCB ASSY

BACK SIDE
USB
SB2367
ETHER
CN1(36p) CN2(36p) CN3(36p) CN4(36p)
HARNESS:ENCODER
CN5(2p)
2T
PANEL UNIT ASSY
SB1151
SB2484
CORE, NF-130
CN9(36p)
CN8(36p)
CN5(5p)
S52163
FFC:CARRIAGE POWER
SB2386
CN17(8p)
CN1(10p)
3T
SB2397
CARRIAGE PCB ASSY PANEL PCB ASSY
SB2152
CN12(45p)
CN7(10p)
CN6(45p)
AC CORD UL/CSA/PSE SB2237
HARNESS:PANEL COM
AC PLUG ADAPTER
SA9223(AC125V 15A) SB0001(AC125V 15A)
CN1(5p)
FFC:CARRIAGE SIGNAL
SB2387 CN3(2p) CN4(18p) CN2(8p)
CN1(2p)
ENCODER PCB ASSY
FPGA CPU
CN9(36p) CN10(36p) CN11(36p) CN12(36p)
HARNESS:PRINT SWITCH
JTAG JTAG
CN13(10p) CN19(16p) CN6(7p) CN11(2p)
SB2394
SB2059
4p
36p 36p 36p 36p
HARNESS:CARRIAGE
BACK LIGHT MODULE ALFB

IH2D HEAD ASSY
IH2D HEAD ASSY
IH2D HEAD ASSY
IH2D HEAD ASSY
SLR
SLP
AC CORD UL/CSA
SWITCH:HW1 L-M410Q4G
SA6452(AC125V 60Hz 13A)
GT SOLENOID JAM ASSY
2p
2p
SB2853
SB3185
SB3185
SB3185
SB3185
LCD:TSE2G0230
SB2395
SPEAKER UNIT
SB2379
3p
A62027
LG6550
LG2239 (JAM)
(K) (M) (C) (Y)
HARNESS:DC POWER
SLR
SLP
SB2399
SB2400
CR MOTOR GT3 ASSY
2p
2p
SB2472
AC CORDE UR AC INLET HARNESS ASSY CONTROL BOX O ASSY
SA9222(AC250V 50/60Hz 10A) SB2445 SB2977
CN5
SLR
SLR
SLP
SLP
SURGE ABSORBER
SLR
SLP
SB2385
PCB ASSY
CN2
CN4
SB2983
CN1(5p)
CN2(8p)
2p
2p
2p
2p
2p
2p
POWER LFA100F
HARNESS:
CN1
CN3
SB2449
AC POWER
PRIMARY FUSE ASSY AC SWITCH HARNESS ASSY
SB2384
SB3298 SB2452 EMC FILTER:ZCB2206-11S
GROUND WIRE
SB2448 SB2381
AC CORD AU 2X GLASS FUSE 10A-50T100H
SA8838(AC250V 50/60Hz 10A)
SB3275(250V 10A)
FG FG FG
SLR
SLR
SLP
SLP
2p
2p
2p
2p
COVER SWITCH HARNESS ASSY
SB2453 SECONDARY FUSE ASSY GLASS FUSE 2.5A-50T025H
SB3299 SB32775(250V 2.5A)
PE FG
SERVICE MANUAL
© 2013 Brother Industries, Ltd. All Rights Reserved. GT-3 Series

I3010990Z
2013.03(0)

gt3 Series

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

gt3 Series

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GT-3 Series Service Manual

Please read this manual before making any adjustments.

GT-3 Series US support homepage http://www.brother-usa.com/Garmentprinters/

· · · · · This symbol ( ) indicates something that you must not do.

[2] Notes on safety

Be sure to connect the ground. If the ground

Always return any removed safety protection devices

GT-3 Series iii

The following warning labels appear on the printer.

Watch your fingers, or you may be

11 High temperature warning display

Be sure to connect the ground. If

Waste Ink Tank

Pretreatment (20kg) Maintenance Solution (5kg)

6-1-8. Platen Origin Sensor...................................... 142 6-2-5. Connectors ..................................................... 314

6-1-12. Carriage Motor.............................................. 153 6-2-9. Speaker........................................................... 322

7. Transporting the GT-3 Series /

8. Error Code List ··········································354

9. Block Diagram of the Control

1. About GT-3 Series

1-2. Software Specifications

1-3. Identifying Your Printer’s Parts

1-3-4. Inside of the Front Cover

No. Name Description

1-3-5. Upper part of the Maintenance Unit

1-3-6. Under the Platen

No. Name Description

1-3-7. Control Panel

1-3-7-2. Menu List

2. Setting up GT-3 Series

Locate your printer taking the following into account.

2-1-2. Required Tools

2-1-3. Other Requirements

USB Flash Drive:

Separator sheet (parchment):

Urethane mat (continuous foam):

T-shirt (printed material)

2-1-4. Consumable Requirements and Options

Consumables Parts Code Maintenance/Replacement parts Parts Code

2-2-2. Transportation of GT-3

2-2-3. Installing Waste Ink Tank

2-2-4. Removing protection materials

Cut or unite the strap.

< Cushioning Removal >

1. Separate the Cushioning in two pieces.

2. Flatten and tilt it to pull it out.

3. Follow the same steps for the other piece.

2-3. Levelling GT-3

2-4. Setting up GT-3 Series

2-4-1. Installing the Print Heads

Advanced Menu Output Check Carriage Test

2. Turn OFF the printer.

3 Slide the Print Head into the Flat

11. Remove the protection film.

Repeat the steps 6 to 12 and mount all the Print Heads.

FFC area (right side of the Tube)

Run the FFCs through the back of the metal plate.

2-5. Preparing your PC

2-5-1. When you have GT-541/GT-782

2-5-2. PC preparation: For Windows XP (32 bit)

1. Turn on your PC.

2-5-3. Connection with USB 2.0 Cable: for Windows XP

4. Insert the Install CD. The following window appears.